2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual

on

  • 1,098 views

2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
1,098
Views on SlideShare
1,084
Embed Views
14

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
3
Comments
0

1 Embed 14

http://marcasautos.wikispaces.com 14

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual 2013 SRT Viper Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

  • COVER IN 2013 Viper OWNER’S MANUAL 2013 ViperChrysler Group LLC13ZD-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A. 1135554cv1 13ZD-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/11/2012 15:40:46 2013 Viper OWNER’S MANUAL 2013 ViperChrysler Group LLC13ZD-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A. COVER IN
  • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optional EQUIPMENTname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and of features and equipment that are no longer available or vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. UseDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that are equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toaccidents. not on this vehicle. The following must be observed during installation. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood The positive power connection should be made directly toalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking normal may require special precautions. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- The negative power connection should be made to bodydriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped. drinking. Never drink and then drive.VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optional EQUIPMENTname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and of features and equipment that are no longer available or vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. UseDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that are equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toaccidents. not on this vehicle. The following must be observed during installation. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood The positive power connection should be made directly toalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking normal may require special precautions. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- The negative power connection should be made to bodydriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped. drinking. Never drink and then drive.
  • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 10
  • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7Ⅵ WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
  • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction.workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
  • INTRODUCTION 5 1
  • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the lefterating procedures that could result in a collision or front corner of the instrument panel and is visible frombodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce- outside the vehicle through the windshield. This numberdures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosuredo not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicleimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- registration, and the title.tions.
  • INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Vehicle Identification NumberNOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Ⅵ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Ⅵ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . .14 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Rearming of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Ⅵ ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Ⅵ DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
  • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEⅥ WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Driver And Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . .43 ▫ Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Ⅵ LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Ⅵ BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .59Ⅵ OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Ⅵ SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .35 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . .38
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) mayYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system have a low or dead battery.consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN). 2Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FeatureThis vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™feature, (refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-GoЉ in ЉThings To KnowBefore Starting Your VehicleЉ for further information).Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition withthe push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate 1 — OFFwhen in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start 3 — ON/RUNRUN will illuminate.
  • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEKey FobThe Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores inthe rear of the Key Fob.The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle hatchshould the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latchon the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumband then pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up. Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, WARNING! (Continued)the ignition or accessory on message will display in thecluster. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child orNOTE: With the Uconnect Touch™ system, the power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- 2window switches, radio and power outlets will remain dren should be warned not to touch the parkingactive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, orthis feature. The time for this feature is programmable. in a location accessible to children, and do notRefer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Your Instrument Panel” for further information. RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key cause serious injury or death. Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (Continued)
  • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Rearming of the System CAUTION! If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle (flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself. unattended. To Arm The SystemVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate, 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is the ЉOFFЉand hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for position.unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock thestarting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park vehicle:lights, and taillights. Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. 3. If any doors are open, close them.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed • Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while theVehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm. NOTE:Press the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmit- • The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the 2ter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or Vehicle Security Alarm.having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Then, • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interiorwithin 30 seconds, open the liftgate by using the key power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in theexterior liftgate handle. The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where theTo Disarm The System system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of ously described arming sequences has occurred, thethe following methods: Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle Entry (RKE) transmitter. and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
  • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery ILLUMINATED ENTRYbecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The interior lights will turn on whenever a door isremain armed when the battery is reconnected; the opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch isexterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this not in the defeat position.occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-Tamper Alert mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of theIf something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in following occur:your absence, the horn will sound three times and the • A door is opened using the outside door handle andexterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the then closed.Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. • A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless EntryElectronic Immobilization System (RKE) transmitter.The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau-thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The The interior lights will turn on and remain on for aboutsystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation four seconds and then fade to off if a door is openedis automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked using the inside door handle.or unlocked.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if thedimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extremedownward position), unless the overhead map/readinglights are turned on manually. 2REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doorsand liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distancesup to approximately 200 ft (60 m) using a hand-held KeyFob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does notneed to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal and the illuminated entry system will turn on. refer to
  • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE“Uconnect™ Access Programmable Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doorsstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First ter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once and the park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-This feature lets you program the system to unlock either edge the signal.the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Sound Horn With Remote Key Lockcurrent setting, refer to “Uconnect™ Access Settings” in This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can beformation. turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock refer to “Uconnect™ Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.This feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the To Unlatch The LiftgateUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twocurrent setting, refer to “Uconnect™ Access Settings” in times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19Using The Panic Alarm Programming Additional TransmittersTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may bethe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one performed at an authorized dealer.second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Transmitter Battery Replacement 2headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, thehorn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032turn on. battery.The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless NOTE:you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate(24 km/h) or greater. • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the backNOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the housing or the printed circuit board.ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position whilethe Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanicaland horn will remain on. latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
  • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery the seal during removal. clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together. General Information This RKE transmitter complies with FCC rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be Emergency Key Removal received, including interference that may cause unde-3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over sired operation. (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 3. The RKE transmitter battery may be weak or dead.distance, check for these two conditions: The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.1. Closeness to a radio transmitter, such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB DOOR LOCKS 2 radios can affect transmitter operation. To verify if this is the cause, move the vehicle to another area and test WARNING! RKE transmitter operation. • Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when2. The RKE transmitter may become “out of sync” and entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot will no longer function if operated more than 255 enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on times while out of range of the vehicle (23 ft or 7 m) or each door closure panel. if operated while the vehicle battery is dead or discon- • For personal security in the event of an collision, nected. To “synchronize” the RKE transmitter, cycle lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when the ignition to the OFF position. Close the hood and all you park and leave the vehicle. doors. Press both buttons on the RKE transmitter for • When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition about 10 seconds. The horn will chirp once to ac- to the OFF position lock, and lock your vehicle. knowledge the signal. Normal RKE transmitter opera- Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause tion should resume. severe personal injuries and death. (Continued)
  • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a access to an unlocked vehicle. number of reasons. A child or others could be • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or in the ON position. A child could operate power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.Power Door Locks • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, orA power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use in a location accessible to children, and do notthis switch to lock or unlock the doors. leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/ RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, WARNING! other controls, or move the vehicle. • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Automatic Door Locks 2 The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer for service. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Power Door Lock Switch The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles withIf you press the power door lock switch while the power door locks if:ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This abled.prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob inthe vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or 2. The driver door is opened.closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door 3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
  • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAutomatic Unlock Doors On Exit ProgrammingTo change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Set-tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurein accordance with local laws.WINDOWSPower WindowsThe window controls on the driver’s door control both ofthe door windows. Power Window Switches There are single window controls on the passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Auto-Down Featuretime is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect™ Access Both power window switches have an AUTO-downSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,further information. release, and the window will go down automatically. 2 WARNING! To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop. not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not To stop the window from going all the way down during leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu- AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If larly unattended children, can become entrapped by Equipped the windows while operating the power window Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and switches. Such entrapment may result in serious the window will go up automatically. injury or death. To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
  • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Upthe first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the windowto stop. probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:NOTE: 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- completely and continue to hold the switch up for an closure, it will reverse direction and then go back additional two seconds after the window is closed. down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second switch again to close the window. detent to open the window completely and continue• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- after the window is fully open. closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote WARNING! Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylin- der located on the rear panel or by activating either of the There is no anti-pinch protection when the window power door lock switches located on the door trim is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the panels. window before closing.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To open the liftgate, press the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch located under the right side of the tail panel, which is located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with 2 one fluid motion. Rear Panel Manual Lock CylinderTo unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, press theLIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times. Pull Up On The Liftgate
  • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under WARNING!the following conditions:• When the ignition is in ON/RUN and the parking • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous brake is not set. exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep• When vehicle speed is not 0 mph (0 km/h). the liftgate closed when you are operating the• When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter vehicle. liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, System Armed — Coupe” under “Security Alarm make sure that all windows are closed, and the System” for additional information. climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the liftgate is Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.open. However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat —Some of the most important safety features in your if equippedvehicle are the restraint systems:• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized 2 seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether positions for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front infant and child restraint systems. For more information passenger on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the• Seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occu- severity and type of collision. pant protection by managing occupant energy during Please pay close attention to the information in this an impact event — if equipped section. It tells you how to use your restraint system• Passenger side seatbelt incorporates an Automatic properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as Locking Retractor (ALR), which locks the seat belt possible. webbing into position by extending the belt all the way
  • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING! inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer be belted at all times. much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled Lap/Shoulder Belts up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Each seat belt is a combined lap/shoulder belt system. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very buckled up properly. sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely with you under normalBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will lockon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicleand cause an collision that includes you. This can happen or being thrown out of the vehicle.far away from home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and theycan reduce the seriousness of injuries in an collision.Some of the worst injuries happen when people arethrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing your belt in the wrong place can make inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out 2 riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions wear• do not allow people to ride in any area of your you seat belt safely and to keep your passengers vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat safe, too. belts. • Two people should never be belted into a single• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seat belt. People belted together can crash into one using a seat belt properly. another in an collision, hurting one another badly.• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more belts are designed to go around the large bones of than one person, no matter what their size. your body. These are the strongest parts of your Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions body and can take the force of a collision they best. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and (Continued) adjust the seat.
  • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. The seat belt latch plate is located at the side of your 4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch seat back. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle3. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2 too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- nearest you. nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear sion. your seat belt snugly. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more (Continued) likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
  • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE5. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 6. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, lift up on the abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt up a little on the shoulder belt, as shown. reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an collision. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo- men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your Removing Slack From Belt vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- ately and have it fixed.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 357. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ tor will withdraw any slack in the belt. shoulder belt.8. To release the belt, push the red button in the buckle. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the 2 The belt will retract automatically to its stowed posi- anchor point. tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create WARNING! a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. the latch plate. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt folded webbing. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
  • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEEnhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph(BeltAlertா) (8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual notification.BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver andfront passenger (if equipped with front passenger The front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may beBeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is activewhenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the frontpassenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (ifturn on and remain on until both front seat belts are equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained infastened. the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that areThe BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorizedReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire tivating BeltAlert௡.duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, theAfter the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminateLight remains illuminated until the respective seat belts while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped withare fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened.pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you willEquipped hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode 2the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow itable on all passenger-seating positions with a combina- to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Lockingtion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating locking mode.position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12years old and under should always be properly re-strained in the rear seat. WARNING!How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until working properly when checked according to the the entire belt is extracted. procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
  • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenThe seat belts for both front seating positions may be We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isremove slack from the seat belt in the event of an the best way to keep the baby safe.collision. These devices improve the performance of the Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the beltseat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.occupant early in an collision. Pretensioners work for all Keep the belt low so that it does not come across thesize occupants, including those in child restraints. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takeNOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat the force if there is an collision.belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be Seat Belt Extenderworn snugly and positioned properly. If a seat belt is too short, even when extended fully, yourThe pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- authorized dealer can provide you with a seat beltstraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension- extender. This extender should only be used if theers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,deployed airbag must be replaced immediately. remove the extender, and store it.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the 2 seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.Driver And Passenger Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) - AirbagsThis vehicle is equipped with airbags for the driver and Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locationspassenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbagsystems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted 2 — Knee Bolsterin the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new FederalAirbag is mounted underneath a cover in the passenger’s regulations for Advanced Airbags. The passenger’s Ad-side of the instrument panel. The words SRS/AIRBAG is vanced Front Airbag is certified to the Federal regulationsembossed on the airbag covers. that define Occupant Classification (Refer to “Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls”).
  • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• No objects should be placed over or near the air • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster bag on the instrument panel, because any such such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a etc. collision severe enough to cause the air bag to • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more inflate. severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work• Do not put anything on or around the air bag with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In covers or attempt to open them manually. You may some collisions, airbags won’t deploy at all. Al- damage the air bags and you could be injured ways wear your seat belts even though you have because the air bags may no longer be functional. airbags. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument designed to open only when the air bags are panel during airbag deployment could cause seri- inflating. ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in extending your arms comfortably to reach the steer- any way. ing wheel or instrument panel. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41The airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows even a small adult. Therefore, even if the driver’sthe airbag to have different rates of inflation that are Advanced Front Airbag deploys, the passenger’s Ad-based on several factors, including collision severity and vanced Front Airbag may not deploy.occupant size. 2 • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;While the seat belts are designed to protect the driver and but they will open during airbag deployment.passenger in many types of collisions, the airbags will • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to andeploy in certain frontal collisions depending on several authorized dealer immediately.factors, including the severity and type of collision.However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, all Here are some simple steps you can take to minimizeoccupants need the seat belts to keep them in the right the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:position for the airbags to protect properly. 1. An infant up to one year or approximately 20 lbs (9 kg)NOTE: should never ride in the vehicle because in the event of a crash, the rear-facing child seat places them too close• The passenger airbag may not deploy if the Occupant to the passenger airbag. Classification System (refer to “Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls”) determines the seat is empty 2. An infant in a rear-facing child safety seat, designed or is occupied by someone that is classified in the for a child up to one year or approximately 20 lbs “child” category. This could be a child, a teenager, or (9 kg), should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger airbag, unless the airbag is
  • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE shut OFF. An airbag deployment can cause severe child safety seat or booster seat. If too large for a injury or death to an infant in this position. Refer to booster seat, the child should wear the lap/shoulder “Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light”. belt properly.3. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 8. Read the instructions provided with your child re- belt properly should be secured in a child safety seat straint to make sure that you are using it properly. or booster seat. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) 9. Read the instructions provided with your child safety4. An older child who does not use a child safety seat or seat or booster seat to make sure that you are using it booster seat should ride buckled properly in their seat. properly.5. Never allow a child to place the shoulder belt behind 10. All occupants should always wear their lap and them or under the arm. shoulder belts properly.6. Never allow a child to lean forward toward the 11. Position the driver seat and passenger seat as far instrument panel as a passenger airbag deployment away from the instrument panel as practical to allow could cause severe injury or death to a child in this the airbags room to inflate. Note that the power position. adjustable pedals allow for more driver’s seat adjust- ment options. Refer to “Adjustable Pedals” in “Un-7. For a child from 1 to 12 years old: Move the passenger derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for de- seat as far back as possible. For a child from 20 to tails. 60 lbs (9 kg to 27 kg): Secure them in the appropriate
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43Knee Impact Bolsters • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position SensorsThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of thedriver and the passenger, and position front occupants • Occupant Classification System (OCS)for the best interaction with the airbags. • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) 2Airbag System Components • Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light • Flex MatYour vehicle may be equipped with the following airbagsystem components: Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:• Airbag Warning Light • Do not modify the passenger seat assembly or compo-• Steering Wheel and Column nents in any way.• Instrument Panel • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-• Knee Impact Bolster ways use the correct seat cover specified for the• Driver Advanced Front Airbag vehicle.• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag • Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat• Front and Side Impact Sensors cover.
  • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those may modify the rate of passenger airbag inflation or approved by Chrysler Group LLC/Mopar௡. prevent passenger airbag deployment based on input from the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The ORC• At no time should any supplemental restraint system will not detect roll-over or rear impacts. (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi- which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC/Mopar௡. tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity andOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rolloverrequired for this vehicle. collisions.The ORC determines if deployment of the front airbags in The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontala frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact collisions, including some that may produce substantialsensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,Advanced Front Airbags, as required, depending on truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherseveral factors, including the severity and type of impact. hand, depending on the type and location of impact,The airbag inflators are designed to provide different Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes withrates of inflation. Based on the level of collision severity, little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severethe ORC determines the proper rate of inflation. The ORC initial deceleration.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over The ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Lighttime, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not and Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicatorgood indicators of whether or not an airbag should have Light for four to eight seconds as a self-checkdeployed. when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN. 2 After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turnSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- off and the PAD Indicator Light will function normallysions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, (Refer to “Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicatoraway from an inflating airbag. Light”). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part ofThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light eitherthe airbag system whenever the ignition is in the START momentarily or continuously. A single chime will soundor ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF if the light comes on again after initial startup.position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate. ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction isThe ORC contains a backup power supply system that noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnosticsmay deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or also record the nature of the malfunction.it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
  • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel WARNING! hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- panel separate and then fold out of the way, as the ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags inflate fully in to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come about 50 to 70 ms. This is about half of the time it takes on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned to blink your eyes. The airbags then deflate quickly while on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes helping to restrain the driver and passenger. The airbag on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the gas is vented toward the instrument panel through vent air bag system immediately. holes in the airbag material. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.Driver Airbag/Passenger Airbag Inflator Units Occupant Classification Module (OCM)The Driver Airbag Inflator Unit is mounted in the steer-ing wheel. The Passenger Airbag Inflator Unit is The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is locatedmounted underneath a cover in the passenger side of the underneath the passenger seat. The OCM uses inputinstrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision from the Flex Mat to classify the occupant in the passen-requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals the ger seat into a size category. The OCM communicates thisinflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is gener- information to the ORC. The ORC may modify the rate ofated to inflate the airbags. Different airbag inflation rates passenger airbag inflation or prevent passenger airbagmay be possible based on several factors, including deployment based on occupant classification.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning airbag is turned OFF. In the presence of an occupantLight will turn on. This indicates that you should take the seated properly in the passenger seat, when the PADvehicle to an authorized dealer for service. The Airbag Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger airbag isWarning Light will turn on whenever there is a fault turned OFF. 2present, which can affect the operation of the airbag The passenger airbag will be enabled for most any sizesystem. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the adult who is seated properly in the passenger seat. ThePAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light will passenger airbag may or may not be enabled for (de-illuminate to show that the passenger airbag is turned pending on size) a small teenager or a small adult who isoff. Should this occur the passenger airbag would remain seated properly in the passenger seat. The driver andoff until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under passenger should always use the PAD Indicator Light asthe seat and interferes with operation of the Flex Mat, a an indication that the passenger is positioned properly infault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator their seat. If the PAD Indicator Light comes on when anLight and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the lodged adult or teenager is in the passenger seat, have theobject is removed, the fault will be cleared automatically passenger reposition their self in the seat until the lightafter a short period. goes out. Remember, if the PAD Indicator Light is illu-Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light minated the passenger airbag will not inflate in the event of a collision.The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Lightindicates to the driver and passenger when the passenger
  • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe passenger airbag will not be enabled for most any Flex Matsize child who is seated properly in the passenger seat The Flex Mat is located beneath the passenger seatand for most properly installed child restraint systems. cushion foam. The Flex Mat sends signals to the OCM forHowever, under certain conditions, even with a properly classifying the occupant in the passenger seat.installed child restraint system, the PAD Indicator Lightmay not be on, even though the airbag is disabled. This Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Flex Mat.can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the thresh- Therefore, the occupant in the passenger seat needs to sitold weight necessary to turn the PAD Indicator Light on. in a normal position (with their feet on or near the floor)In any case, DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off if in order to be classified properly. If an occupant’s weightthe PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated. is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door or instrument panel), the system may not classify the WARNING! occupant properly. Furthermore, objects lodged under the seat can prevent the occupant’s weight from being An infant in rear facing child safety seat, designed measured properly and may result in the occupant being for a child up to one year or approximately 20 lbs classified improperly. (9 kg), should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger airbag, unless the The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo- airbag is shut OFF. An airbag deployment can cause nents that affect passenger airbag deployment. Correctly severe injury or death to an infant in this position. functioning passenger seat components are critical for the OCS to classify the passenger properly and calculate the
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49proper airbag deployment. Do not make any modifica- • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long astions to the passenger seat components, assembly, or to the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled tothe seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs OFF.service for any reason, take the vehicle to your autho- 2 • Unlock the doors automatically.rized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-ries may be used. If A Deployment OccursEnhanced Accident Response System The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, ifthe communication network remains intact, and the NOTE: Front airbags will not deploy in all collisions.power remains intact, depending on the nature of the This does not mean something is wrong with the airbagevent the ORC will determine whether to have the system.Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-ing functions:• Cut off fuel to the engine.• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled to OFF.
  • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onor all of the following may occur: your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra- structions for cleaning. sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de- passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those airbags will not be in place to protect you. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. WARNING! They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the troller (ORC) system serviced as well. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may• Modifications to any part of the air bag system not function properly if modifications are made. 2 could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any be injured if the air bag system is not there to air bag system service. If your seat, including your protect you. Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any wiring, including adding any kind of badges or way (including removal or loosening/tightening of stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to add aftermarket side steps or running boards. modify the air bag system for persons with dis-• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air abilities, contact your authorized dealer. bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
  • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAirbag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may You will want to have the airbags ready to not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly inflate for your protection in a collision. The check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the circuits and interconnecting wiring associated proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if thewith airbag system electrical components. While the fuse is good.airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if anyof the following occurs, have an authorized dealer ser- Child Restraintsvice the airbag system immediately. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during time, including babies and children. Every state in the the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first United States and all Canadian provinces require small cycled to the ON/RUN position. children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. eight-second interval.• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 until they reach either the height or weight limit of WARNING! their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to and convertible child seats. 2 hold even an infant on your lap could become so • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the great that you could not hold the child, no matter vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth how strong you are. The child and others could be until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Con-There are different sizes and types of restraints for vertible child seats often have a higher weight limit inchildren from newborn size to the child almost large the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do,enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child so they can be used rearward-facing by children whoseat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less thanfor your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your at least two years old. Children should remainchild. rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.Infant and Child Restraints• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or
  • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE All children whose weight or height is above the WARNING! forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se- belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over passenger airbag. In a collision, a passenger airbag the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster riding in rearward-facing infant restraints. seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.Older Children and Child RestraintsChildren who are two years old or who have outgrown WARNING!their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- • Improper installation can lead to failure of anfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and infant or child restraint. It could come loose in aconvertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- collision. The child could be badly injured ortion are for children who are over two years old or who killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’shave outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of directions exactly when installing an infant ortheir rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should child restraint.remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness foras long as possible, up to the highest weight or height (Continued)allowed by the child seat.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 • Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of WARNING! (Continued) the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in back? the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor- ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it • Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder 2 loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it between their neck and arm? could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause • Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching serious personal injury. the child’s thighs and not their stomach?Children Too Large for Booster Seats • Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then thecomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If theover the front of the seat when their back is against thechild is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-seatback, should use the seat belt in the seat. Use this odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move thesimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the facevehicle’s seat belt alone: or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm• Can the child sit all the way back against the back of or behind their back. the vehicle seat?
  • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: For additional information, refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchorwww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web- Child restraints having tether straps and hookssite for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/ for connection to tether anchors have beenroadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm available for some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will provide add-on WARNING! tether-strap kits for some of their older products. There is Improper installation of a child restraint to the a tether strap anchor located behind the child tether LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or access cover behind the passenger seat. child restraint. The child could be badly injured or To attach a child restraint tether strap: killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Move the seat forward. 2. Move the seatback to its full forward position. 3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 2Child Tether Access Cover Child Tether NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of the child tether. 4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
  • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop. 8. Install the child restraint according to the manufactur- er’s directions. 9. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s directions. WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Tether Hook belt6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply The passenger seat belt is equipped with an automatic body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters locking retractor for child restraint system installation. It have latched. is designed to keep the lap portion of the restraint held7. Return the seatback to an upright position. tightly to the passenger seat (Refer to “Automatic Lock- ing Mode”).
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59To restrain the child seat: retractor. In this mode, you will only be able to retract excess webbing into the retractor to secure the child restraint.1. Pull enough webbing from the retractor to allow the belt to pass through the child restraint and insert the Transporting Pets latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Deploying airbags could harm your pet. An unrestrained 22. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull all of pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a the webbing out of the retractor. passenger during panic braking or in an collision.3. Allow some of the webbing to retract back into the Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers retractor. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking that are secured by seat belts. sound indicating that the belt is now in Automatic Locking Mode. BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain4. Tighten the lap portion of the belt and allow the excess (engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle. webbing to retract back to the retractor. If it still does Following these few simple guidelines is all that is not make the child restraint secure, then secure the necessary for a good break-in. child restraint with the Child Restraint Tether Anchor. For the first 500 miles (800 km):NOTE: Once the belt is in Automatic Locking Mode, youwill not be able to pull any more of the webbing out of the • Keep your vehicle speed below the legal, posted speed limit and your engine speed below 4,000 RPM.
  • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow, SAFETY TIPS for long periods. Transporting Passengers• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO throttle acceleration. AREA.• Use the proper gear for your speed range. WARNING!• Wait until the engine has reached normal operating • Do not leave children or animals inside parked temperature before driving at the recommended maxi- vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may mum break-in speed. cause serious injury or death.• Avoid excessive idling. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill. riding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslyNOTE: A new engine will consume some oil during the injured or killed.first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourshould be considered a normal part of the break-in and vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatnot interpreted as a sign of difficulty. belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust WARNING! system.Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust 2monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside theBreathing it can make you unconscious and can vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle iseventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-follow these safety tips: plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open confined areas any longer than needed to move seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes your vehicle in or out of the area. to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised open, make sure that all windows are closed and for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
  • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESafety Checks You Should Make Inside The authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comesVehicle on while driving, have the system checked by an autho- rized dealer.Seat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defrosterfrays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and placeimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See yourFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after able.a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Informationor retractor condition, replace the belt. Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well ofAirbag Warning Light your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so thatThe light should come on and remain on for four to eight they cannot slip out of position and interfere with theseconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in otherto ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your ways.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside LightsThe Vehicle Have someone observe the operation of brake lights andTires exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turnExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument 2 panel.patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for Door Latchescuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.Check the tires for proper pressure. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ 3 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Ⅵ VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .101 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .71 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Ⅵ SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Phone Call Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
  • 66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Ⅵ LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Ⅵ WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .122 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .117 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Ⅵ TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Ⅵ ADJUSTABLE PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Adjustable Foot Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Ⅵ ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 3 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Ⅵ ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .141Ⅵ PARKVIEW௡ REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF Ⅵ CUPHOLDERS — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Ⅵ STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — With Touch ▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145Ⅵ GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .133 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡. . .134 Ⅵ REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .138
  • 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMIRRORS NOTE: The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1 button located on the bottom of the mirror.Automatic Dimming MirrorThis mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from Assist Callvehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push buttononly be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one of several predefined locations for immediate sup- port: • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con- nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance. • Uconnect™ Access Customer Care – In-vehicle sup- port for Uconnect™ Access and Uconnect™ Access via Mobile features. Automatic Dimming Mirror • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 699-1-1 Call NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of theReport an accident without taking your eyes off the road. lane next to your vehicle.Just press 9-1-1 on your mirror and connect. WARNING! CAUTION! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side 3 To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never convex mirror will look smaller and farther away spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. than they really are. Relying too much on your Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with mirror clean. another vehicle or other object. Use your insideOutside Mirrors mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrorsto center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slightoverlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
  • 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPower Mirrors The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust adoor trim panel. mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust. NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Vanity Mirror A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. Power Mirror Controls
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for 3 supported phones. For Uconnect™ customer support, visit www.Uconnect- Phone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between Vanity Mirror the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’sUconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED microphone for private conversation.Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through yourlows you to dial a phone number with your mobile Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ Uconnect™ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the global“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
  • 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEstandard that enables different electronic devices to con- Uconnect™ Phone Buttonnect to each other without wires or a docking station, so The radio or steering wheel controls (ifUconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your equipped) will contain the two control buttonsmobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as (Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice Com-long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to mand button) that will enable you tothe vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone access the system. When you press the button you willallows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beepsystem. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be is your signal to give a command.used with the system at a time. The system is available inEnglish, Spanish, or French languages. Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra- WARNING! dio. The individual buttons are described in the Any voice commanded system should be used only “Operation” section. in safe driving conditions following all applicable The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten- Profile certified Bluetooth௡ mobile phone. See the tion should be focused on safely operating the ve- Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your hicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for causing serious injury or death. details.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for thecle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or anothercan be adjusted either from the radio volume control prompt.knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right • For certain operations, compound commands can beswitch), if so equipped. used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and thenThe radio display will be used for visual prompts from “Pair a Device”, the following compound command 3the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth௡ Device”.certain radios. • For each feature explanation in this section, only theOperation compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say eachVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound form voice com-menu structure. Voice commands are required after mostUconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands:specific command and then guided through the availableoptions. “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
  • 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Command Tree Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile PhoneRefer to “Voice Tree” in this section. To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone.Help CommandIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. Thethe beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-options at any prompt if you ask for help. tions for pairing.To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the • Press the button to begin. button on the radio control head. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayCancel Command “Device Pairing”.At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a and follow the audible prompts.few instances the system will take you back to theprevious menu. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi- fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN phone when you make a call. You can select to use a after the initial pairing process. lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile Dial By Saying A Number phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be 3 • Press the button to begin. given a unique phone name. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a “Dial”. priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile • The system will prompt you to say the number you phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any want to call. given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the and then dial. The number will appear in the display vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three of certain radios. and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
  • 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECall By Saying A Name Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone• Press the button to begin. If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text “Call”. names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s• The system will prompt you to say the name of the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book person you want to call. Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ website for supported phones.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, • To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ- downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook by Saying a Name” section. or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook. made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and start the vehicle. then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook loaded and updated every time a phone is connected NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is to the Uconnect™ Phone. recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- • Press the button to begin. loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 3 able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- “Phonebook New Entry”. able for use. • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- phone is accessible. mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” instead of “Bob”.• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be book entry, if desired. edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phone connection. phonebook entry that you are adding.
  • 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAfter you are finished adding an entry into the phone- • Press the button to begin.book, you will be given the opportunity to add more • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayphone numbers to the current entry or to return to the “Phonebook Edit Entry”.main menu. • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebookThe Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 entry that you wish to edit.names in the phonebook with each name having up tofour associated phone numbers and designations. Each • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.only in that language. In addition, if equipped and • When prompted, recite the new phone number for thesupported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- phonebook entry that you are editing.cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inNOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a deleted or edited.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79mobile and a home number, but you can add “John from the list, press the button while theDoe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and sayEntry” feature. “Delete”.Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry • After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended 3 work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation youwhen the vehicle is not in motion. wish to delete.• Press the button to begin. • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say language is deleted. “Phonebook Delete”. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will deleted or edited. then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • Press the button to begin. Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say from which you choose. To select one of the entries “Phonebook Erase All”.
  • 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you • To call one of the names in the list, press the but- wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. ton during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call”.• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” operations at this point.• Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted. • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited. • The selected number will be dialed.List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook Phone Call Features• Press the button to begin. The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service “Phonebook List Names”. plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- your mobile service provider for the features that you book entries, if available. have.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in theCurrently In Progress market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user canWhen you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is Incall. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the Progress 3call, press and hold the button until you hear a single To make a second call while you are currently on a call,beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followedAnswer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish toCurrently In Progress call. The first call will be on hold while the second call isIf a call is currently in progress and you have another in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Togglingincoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refercall waiting that you normally hear when using your to “Conference Call” in this section.mobile phone. Press the button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Holdcall on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the but- ton until you hear a single beep.
  • 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEToggling Between Calls press and hold the button until you hear a doubleIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined intopress the button until you hear a single beep, indicat- one conference call.ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have Call Terminationswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but-Conference Call ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if thereWhen two calls are in progress (one active and one on is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If thehold), press and hold the button until you hear a active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call ondouble beep indicating that the two calls have been hold may not become active automatically. This is celljoined into one conference call. phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.Three-Way Calling RedialTo initiate three-way calling, press the button whilea call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • Press the button to begin.described under “Making a Second Call While Current • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayCall is in Progress”. After the second call has established, “Redial”.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that • After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue was dialed from your mobile phone. on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from theNOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.Uconnect™ Phone. • An active call is automatically transferred to the mo- bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF. 3Call ContinuationCall continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect™ Phone FeaturesUconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition has been Language Selectionswitched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone isable on the vehicle can be any one of three types: using:• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can • Press the button to begin. continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and the name of the language you wish to switch to transfer of the call to the mobile phone. English, Espanol, or Francais. • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.
  • 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAfter selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayvoice commands will be in that language. “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, andoperation, only the language-specific 32-name phone- Mexico.book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and is usable across all languages. NOTE:Emergency Assistance • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. andIf you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed mayreachable: not be applicable with the available mobile service and• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency area. number for your area. • If supported, this number may be programmable onIf the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is some systems. To do this, press the button and sayoperational, you may reach the emergency number as “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.follows: • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your• Press the button to begin. chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 NOTE: WARNING! • The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer- country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- gency, your mobile phone must be: 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- • turned on, 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside • paired to the Uconnect™ System, Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside 3 • and have network coverage. Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the War-Roadside Assistance ranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assis- tance references.If you need roadside assistance: • If supported, this number may be programmable on• Press the button to begin. some systems. To do this, press the button and say• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”. “Roadside Assistance”. Paging To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
  • 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Mail Calling followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), youTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.with Automated Systems”. Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed byWorking With Automated Systems “Send”, is also to be used for navigating through anThis method is used in instances where one generally has automated customer service center menu structure, andto press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while to leave a number on a pager.navigating through an automated telephone system. You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entriesYou can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pagermail system or an automated service, such as a paging entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish toservice or automated customer service line. Some ser- call and then press the button and say, “Send.” Thevices require immediate response selection. In some system will prompt you to enter the name or number andinstances, that may be too quick for use of the say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, asWhen calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that tones over the phone.normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequenceon your mobile phone keypad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87NOTE: Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system network configurations. This is normal. from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the button to begin. 3 use of this feature. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayBarge In — Overriding Prompts one of the following:The “Voice Command” button can be used when you – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”command immediately. For example, if a prompt isasking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you Phone And Network Status Indicatorscould press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to If available on the radio and/or on a premium displayselect that option without having to listen to the rest of such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported bythe voice prompt. your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call
  • 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEusing Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still beDialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. InYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialingvia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the button.caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Following the beep, say “Mute”.dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobilephone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same • Press the button.as if you dial the number using Voice Command. • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send thedial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle Advanced Phone Connectivityaudio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phonetion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feelthat the call did not go through even though the call is in The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phoneaudio. without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names ofand say “Transfer Call”. all paired mobile phones in order from the highest toConnect Or Disconnect Link Between The the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a pairedUconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone phone being announced, press the button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for 3Your mobile phone can be paired with many differentelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a pairedwith one electronic device at a time. phone. Select Another Mobile PhoneIf you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using anotherUconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • Press the button to begin.List Paired Mobile Phone Names • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• Press the button to begin. “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
  • 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• You can also press the button at any time while the • You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that list is being played, and then choose the phone you you wish to select. wish to delete.• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones Voice Training• Press the button to begin. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ “Setup Phone Pairing”. Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following proce- prompts. dures: From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91• Press and hold the button for five seconds until • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say the session begins, or, “Setup”, then “Reset”.• Press the button and say the “Voice Training”, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, “System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will mand. prompt you before resetting to factory settings. 3You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to Voice Commandrestore the factory setting or repeat the words and • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror tophrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overheadbest results, the Voice Training session should be com- console (if equipped) and the mirror.pleted when the vehicle is parked with the enginerunning, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.switched off. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldThis procedure may be repeated with a new user. The speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away fromsystem will adapt to the last trained voice only. you.Reset • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.• Press the button.
  • 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names • low-to-medium blower setting, in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo- • low road noise, cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the • smooth road surface, entries are not similar. • fully closed windows, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • dry weather condition. be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number cents, the system may not always work for some. combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing• When navigating through an automated system such number combinations may not be supported. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. compromised with the convertible top down.• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93Far End Audio Performance Recent Calls• Audio quality is maximized under: If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • low-to-medium blower setting, load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, ing and Missed Calls. • low road noise, SMS 3 • smooth road surface, Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on • fully closed windows, your phone. • dry weather conditions, and Read Messages: • operation from the driver’s seat. If you receive a new text message while your phone is• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and be made to notify you that you have a new text message. not the Uconnect™ Phone. If you wish to hear the new message:• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced • Press the button. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” compromised with the convertible top down.
  • 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or you. number of the person you wish to send the message to.After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:the message using Uconnect™ Phone. 1. YesSend Messages: 2. NoYou can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send 3. Where are you?a new message: 4. I need more direction.• Press the button. 5. L O L• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” 6. Why• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. I love you “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. 8. Call meTo send a message, press the button while the 9. Call me latersystem is listing the message and say “Send.” 10. Thanks
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 9511. See You in 15 minutes • Press the button.12. I am on my way • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you13. I’ll be late will then be given a choice to change it.14. Are you there yet? Bluetooth௡ Communication Link 315. Where are we meeting? Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the16. Can this wait? Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone17. Bye for now off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in18. When can we meet? Bluetooth௡ ON mode.19. Send number to call Power-Up20. Start without me After switching the ignition from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must waitTurn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stopthe system from announcing the new incoming mes-sages.
  • 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 3
  • 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) zero all one call two cancel 3 three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star (*) English plus (+) erase all pound (#) Espanoladd location Francais
  • 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect™ Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101General Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPEDThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System OperationRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: The Uconnect™ Voice Command system al-• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by lows you to control your AM, FM radio, USB 3 the party responsible for compliance could void the Mass Storage Class device, iPod family of user’s authority to operate the equipment. devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio device, and a memo recorder.• This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys-• This device must accept any interference received, tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the including interference that may cause undesired op- Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands eration. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
  • 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pressing the Voice Command button while the WARNING! system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system Any voice commanded system should be used only will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or in safe driving conditions following all applicable change commands. This will become helpful once you laws. All attention should be focused on safely start to learn the options. operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, collision causing serious injury or death. “Help” or “Main Menu”.When you press the Voice Command button, you These commands are universal and can be used from anywill hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending uponcommand. the active application.NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and atseconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.options. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan isoptions, press the Voice Command button, listen for set to low.the beep, and say your command. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menumand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice CommandCommands button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.The Voice Command system understands two types ofcommands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands: 3times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)radio mode is active. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)Changing The Volume • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth௡ Streaming mode)2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) mand system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
  • 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERadio AM (Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)Medium Wave — If Equipped) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)this mode, you may say the following commands: USB Mode• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you• “Next Station” (to select the next station) may say the following commands:• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, AlbumRadio FM Name, Track Name, etc.)To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In Bluetooth௡ Streaming (BT) Modethis mode, you may say the following commands: To switch to Bluetooth௡ Streaming (BT) mode, say• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) “Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:• “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) Memo Mode• “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:Satellite Radio • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During theTo switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite recording, you may press the Voice Command 3Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- button to stop recording. You proceed by sayingmands: one of the following commands:• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its – “Save” (to save the memo) spoken number) – “Continue” (to continue recording)• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) – “Delete” (to delete the recording)• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Com-• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) mand button to stop playing memos. You pro-• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) ceed by saying one of the following commands:• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) – “Next” (to play the next memo)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) – “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
  • 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE – “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Language Spanish”• “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Tutorial”Setup • “Voice Training”To switch to system setup, you may say on of the NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voicefollowing: Command button first and wait for the beep before• “Change to system setup” speaking the “Barge In” commands.• “Main menu system setup” Voice Training• “Switch to system setup” For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™• “Change to setup” Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.• “Main menu setup” or 1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System• “Switch to setup” Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the systemIn this mode, you may say the following commands: and will improve recognition.• “Language English”• “Language French”
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1072. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by SEATS Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the Voice Training Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the session should be completed when the vehicle is vehicle. parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re- WARNING! peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the 3 last trained voice only. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
  • 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEManual SeatsForward and Rearward AdjustmentThe adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desiredposition. Then, using body pressure, move forward andrearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjustershave latched. Seat Adjustment Bar Seat Height Adjustment The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out- board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to its full upright position. 3 Height Adjustment LeverRecliner Adjustment Recline LeverThe recliner lever is located on the outboard side of theseat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull therecliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is inthe desired position, and release the lever. To return theseat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the
  • 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Seats WARNING! On models equipped with power seats, the power seat• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of floor. control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Power Seat Switch
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111Adjusting The Seat Forward Or RearwardThe seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat willmove in the direction of the switch. Release the switchwhen the desired position has been reached. 3Adjusting The Seat Up Or DownThe height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pushupward or push downward on the seat switch, the seatwill move in the direction of the switch. Release theswitch when the desired position is reached.Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward Power Seat Recliner SwitchThe seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.Release the switch when the desired position has beenreached.
  • 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to control which could cause a collision and serious the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if injury or death. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat path. belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the hood latches.1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front fender to gain access to the hood release lever. 3 Hood Release Lever Hood Release Lever Location
  • 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position. CAUTION! • Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by the side of the road where large trucks pass by. Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood. Al- ways close the hood in such situations. • To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive the vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged. Opened HoodNOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the liftinghand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. Theassist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normalusage position.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious 3 injury or death.LIGHTSHeadlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of Headlight Switch the instrument panel. This switch controls the Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru- for parking light and instrument panel light operation.ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent forinterior lights. headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- eration.
  • 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAutomatic Headlights NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,This system automatically turns the headlights on or off refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understandingaccording to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, Your Instrument Panel” for further information.rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight Headlight Time Delaytime delay feature is also on. This means the headlights This feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationwill stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving yourin the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off, vehicle in an unlit area.move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFFNOTE: The engine must be running before the head- position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn offlights will come on in the automatic mode. the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay intervalHeadlights On With Wipers (Available with begins when the headlight switch is turned off.Automatic Headlights Only) If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or placeWhen this feature is active, the headlights will turn on the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel theapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on delay.if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they willaddition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turn off in the normal manner.turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117NOTE: NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding feature. Your Instrument Panel” for further information.• The headlight delay time is programmable using the 3 Lights-On Reminder Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition for further information. is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.Daytime Running Lights (DRL)The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, theheadlights are off and the parking brake is off. Theheadlight switch must be used for normal nighttimedriving.
  • 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMultifunction Lever Turn SignalsThe multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrowssignals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to showmultifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.steering column. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Multifunction Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119High/Low Beam Switch light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.Push the multifunction lever away from you to switchthe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever Dimmer Controlstoward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and isFlash-To-Pass located on the left side of the instrument panel. 3You can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. Thiswill turn on the high beams headlights until the lever isreleased.Interior LightsThe interior lights come on when a door is opened.To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn offautomatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved tothe LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lightswere switched on manually or are on because a door isopen. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk Dimmer Controls
  • 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWith the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left The right dimmer control adjusts the ambient light fordimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the interior door release handles.the instrument panel lights and turn on the courtesylights. Right Dimmer Control Left Dimmer Control
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121Interior Light Control Interior Light Defeat (OFF)Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFFsecond detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior position. The interior lights will remain off when thelights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this doors are open.position. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) 3 Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park- ing lights or headlights are on. Interior Lights
  • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemThe multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsand washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-the left side of the steering column. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are six delay settings which includes high, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent Windshield Wiper/Washer Control settings for high-speed wiper operation.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Mist Feature CAUTION! When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, through an automatic car wash. Damage to the located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to windshield wipers may result if the wiper control the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one is left in any position other than off. time and automatically shut off. 3• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi- NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur spray the windshield with washer fluid. when the vehicle is restarted. Windshield Washers• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, off position. If the windshield wiper control is located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to turned off and the blades cannot return to the off the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is
  • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEreleased. It will then resume the intermittent interval Headlights On With Wipers (Available withpreviously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while Automatic Headlights Only)in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately three times after the wash knob is re- approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onleased. if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. InTo prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers arein cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or turned off if they were turned on by this feature.exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can berating information can be found on most washer fluid turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,containers. refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! TILT STEERING COLUMN Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the the windshield during freezing weather, warm the column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward windshield with the defroster before and during you and then move the steering wheel upward or down- windshield washer use. ward as desired. When the column is in the desired
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125position, push the release lever forward to lock the WARNING!column firmly in place. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to 3 follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver Tilt Steering Column Lever to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
  • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of • Further small adjustments may be necessary to findthe steering column. the best possible seat/pedal position. CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. Adjustable Pedals Switch You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.NOTE:• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127Adjustable Foot Rest To adjust the pedal:This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest 1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortableforward or backward and to rotate it upward or down- position.ward to allow for greater driving comfort. 2. Using a 13 mm socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal. 3 3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate it upward or downward as desired. 4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). Adjustable Foot Rest
  • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-right side of the steering wheel. tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in Electronic Speed Control Buttons use.1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without WARNING! erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally speed memory. set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. To Resume Speed You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3 leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speedTo Set A Desired Speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To Vary The Speed Settinghas reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the buttonoperate at the selected speed. is continually pressed, the set speed will continue toNOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed increase until the button is released, then the new setand on level ground before pressing the SET button. speed will be established.To Deactivate Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
  • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onheld in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to moderate hills is normal.decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur sowhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speedwill be established. Control.Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of WARNING!the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where theTo Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youpedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsUsing Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearEQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ RearBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the widthimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever of the vehicle the static grid lines will show separatethe shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the 3displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- vehicle.The following table shows the approximate dis-tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of tances for each zone:the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear License plate. Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
  • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should onlyusing the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera ischeck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in yourcheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path.structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must beresponsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able tomust continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView௡. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — With Touch The HomeLink௡ buttons, located on the sunvisor, desig-Screen Radio nate the three different HomeLink௡ channels. The HomeLink௡ indicator is located above the center button.1. Turn the Radio on.2. Press the “More” soft-key.3. Press the “Settings” soft-key. 34. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview௡ Backup Camera” to enable/disable.GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmittersthat operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink௡ Buttons SunvisorHomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-battery. rity Alarm is active.
  • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBefore You Begin Programming HomeLinkா NOTE:Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed whenbefore you begin programming. programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notFor more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasea new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atthe device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.system. Programming A Rolling CodeErase all channels before you begin programming. Toerase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manu-position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ factured after 1995. These garage door openers can bebuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedindicator flashes. where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ button you want to program and the hand-held trans- 3 mitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- cator light. The HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- Training The Garage Door Opener lease both buttons after the indicator light changes1 — Door Opener from slow to rapid.2 — Training Button 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
  • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps: opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the nextstep after the LEARN button has been pressed. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed not release the button. HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- activates, programming is complete. ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Codecomplete the training. For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedTo program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, before 1995.repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.erase the channels.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1372. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in erase the channels. view. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps: 3 mitter button. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- cator light. HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly and 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the fre- the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release not release the button. both buttons after the indicator light changes from 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- slow to rapid. ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button remaining steps. and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.
  • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECanadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button,For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-heldthat require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ hasseveral seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly whenCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- fully trained.nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡ 4. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flashto pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may takeCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garagetime-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming.It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ buttonprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garage and observe the indicator light.door or gate motor. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. erase the channels.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLinkாprogramming, plug it back in at this time. To operate, press and release the programmedReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-follow these steps: 3 ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. also be used at any time.2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until Security the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn not release the button. in your vehicle.3. Without releasing the button proceed with To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all follow all remaining steps. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
  • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETroubleshooting Tips WARNING!If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, hereare some of the most common solutions: • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans-• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit- ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, ter. pets or other objects are in the path of the door or• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code. opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes• Did you unplug the device for programming and most garage door opener models manufactured remember to plug it back in? after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener withoutIf you have any problems, or require assistance, please these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com forwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141General Information • The term IC before the certification/registration num-This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following fications were met.two conditions: ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp) 32. This device must accept any interference that may be power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones, received including interference that may cause unde- small electronics and other low powered electrical acces- sired operation. sories.NOTE:• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.
  • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOne power outlet is located on the center console to the The second power outlet is located between the seatright of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is con-access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This nected directly by the battery and powered at all times.power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ONor ACC position. NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING! CAUTION!To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if• Do not touch with wet hands. plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will 3• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or vehicle. prevent the engine from starting.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, shock and failure. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- tently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
  • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECUPHOLDERS — If Equipped STORAGEThere are two cupholders located in the rear of the center Glovebox Storageconsole. An electronic glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to open the glovebox. Center Console Cupholders Glove Box Storage Compartment
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Console Features Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the center console rearward of the shift lever. 3 Opened Glove Box Storage CompartmentNOTE: The glovebox storage compartment will lockwith the door locks. Center Console Cubby Bin Location
  • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECargo Net Storage— If Equipped Storage Bin — If EquippedThere is a cargo net storage area located between the There is a storage bin located between the driver anddriver and passengers seat. passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the storage bin. Cargo Net Storage Location Storage Bin Location
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Door Storage WARNING! The door panels contain storage areas located in theDo not operate this vehicle with a console compart- lower center area of the door panel.ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, musicplayers, and other handheld electronic devicesshould be stowed while driving. Use of these devices 3while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-tion, resulting in death or injury. Door Panel Storage
  • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEREAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION!Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: The rear window defroster button is located on • Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control panel. Press this button to turn window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onon the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothwill illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to therear window defroster automatically turns off after ap- heating elements. Labels can be peeled off afterproximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of soaking with warm water.operation, press the button a second time. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasiveNOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window cleaners on the interior surface of thewindow defroster only when the engine is operating. window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 4Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .153 ▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .177Ⅵ ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Ⅵ Uconnect™ ACCESS SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . .179 (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Uconnect™ Access System Settings . . . . . . . . .179 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Ⅵ Uconnect™ ACCESS RADIOS – IF EQUIPPED . .189 ▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .189 ▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
  • 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELⅥ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .190 ▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Ⅵ RADIO ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Window Fogging and Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . .197Ⅵ RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .191 ▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Ⅵ CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . . . . .191 ▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 41 — Air Outlet 6 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Climate Controls2 — Sound System Speaker 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Dimmer Controls3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect Touch™ System 13 — Headlight Switch4 — Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop Button 9 — Uconnect Touch™ System Hard Controls5 — Glove Compartment Lock 10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard Switch, Back Button)
  • 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains1. Speedometer unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”Indicates vehicle speed. in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for2. Air Bag Warning Light further information. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 4. Turn Signal Indicators as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during 4 when the turn signal lever is operated. starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is drivenhave the system inspected at an authorized dealer as more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, asoon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, checkfurther information. for a defective outside light bulb.3. Seat Belt Reminder Light Both turn signal arrows will flash in unison with the front When the ignition is first cycled to ON/RUN, this and rear turn signals when the HAZARD WARNING light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a button is operated. bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’sseat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
  • 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Leaving the hazard flashers on for extended • Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range, toperiods will wear down the battery. Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)5. High Beam Indicator • Menu Titles / Odometer This indicator shows that the high beam head- • Menu Set (Selectable Icons) lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- • Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pulltoward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. • Reconfigurable Telltales6. EVIC Menu Set (Selectable ICONS) • Audio / Phone InformationThe EVIC displays are located In the center portion of the • Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there arecluster and consists of eight section: sub-menus available, the position within the sub- menus is here• Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph) Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will further information. illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for non critical warning, red for critical warnings and white for on demand information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1557. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. 4If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the WARNING!master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on ishydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could haveSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.In this case, the light will remain on until the conditionhas been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake Systembooster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Forceand a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
  • 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELOperation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 9. Oil Pressure Warning Lightcycling the ignition from the OFF position to the ON/ This light indicates low engine oil pressure. TheRUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi- light should turn on momentarily when the engine ismately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless started. If the light turns on while driving, stop thethe parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. AIf the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected chime will sound when this light turns on.by an authorized dealer. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.The light also will turn on when the parking brake is This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.applied with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 10. Vehicle Security Light — If Equippedapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application. This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-8. Tachometer mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle securityThis gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly(RPM x 1000) until the vehicle is disarmed. 11. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 15712. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affectEquipped the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper should be checked monthly when cold and tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to inflated to the inflation pressure recommended maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has low tire pressure telltale.tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 4 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSvehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator isAs an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When theequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuouslyone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyoverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
  • 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELalternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 13. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, thattires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the monitors engine control systems. The light willreplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,to continue to function properly. before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when cycling the ignition from OFF to ON/RUN, have the CAUTION! condition checked promptly. The TPMS has been optimized for the original Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should warning have been established for the tire size be serviced if the light stays on through several of your equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will tion or sensor damage may result when using re- drive normally and will not require towing. placement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 14. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Lights CAUTION! • Electronic Speed Control ON IndicatorProlonged driving with the MIL on could cause This light will turn on when the electronicdamage to the engine control system. It also could speed control is ON. For further information,affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is • Electronic Speed Control SET Indicatorrequired. This light will turn on when the electronic 4 speed control is SET. For further information, WARNING! refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referencedabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normal 15. Cruise Speed Set Valueoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you Speed value shown when set.drive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could resultin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants orothers.
  • 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL16. EVIC Amber Telltale Lights • Engine Temperature This telltale warns of an overheated engine con-When the appropriate conditions exist, the following dition. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-EVIC Amber Telltale Lights will display: proaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illuminate• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator — If and a single chime will sound after reaching a setEquipped threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera- This light will turn on to indicate the wind- ture gauge to pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will shield washer fluid is low occur until the engine is allowed to cool. If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and• Low Fuel Light stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to fuel is added. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To17. EVIC Red Telltale Lights Do In Emergencies” for more information.When the appropriate conditions exist, the followingEVIC Red Telltale Lights will display:
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161• Charging System • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) This telltale shows the status of the electrical This telltale informs you of a problem with the charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If theon while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non- telltale comes on while driving, have the sys-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at tem checked by an authorized dealer.idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on whilethat the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the the engine is running. Cycle the ignition when the vehiclecharging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in 4an authorized dealer. the NEUTRAL position and the parking brake applied.If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting The telltale should turn off.Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your• Oil Pressure Warning vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the telltale the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle is flashing when the engine is running, immediate serviceand shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will is required. You may experience reduced performance, ansound for four minutes when this light turns on. elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle mayDo not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. require towing.This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
  • 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Oil Temperature Warning Light 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ This telltale indicates high engine oil tempera- Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped ture. If the light turns on while driving, stop The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as Light” in the instrument cluster will come on possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUNwhen this light turns on. position. It should go out with the engine• Door Ajar running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator This telltale turns on when one or more doors Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this ajar. light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-Light — If Equipped rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- diagnosed and corrected. trol (ESC) is off. NOTE: The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163Each time the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, the ESC If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, itsystem will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However,The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds the conventional brake system will continue to operatewhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver thatcaused the ESC activation. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock20. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light 4 brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, have the light (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition inspected by an authorized dealer. is cycled to the ON/RUN position and may 21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped stay on for as long as four seconds. This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
  • 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful(EVIC) information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: • Digital Speedometer • SRT Performance Info • Vehicle Info • Fuel Economy Info • Trip A • Trip B • Radio Info • Stored MessagesThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- • Screen Setuptures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. • Diagnostic Codes • Vehicle Hibernation Settings
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165• Vehicle Settings • UP Arrow ButtonThe system allows the driver to select information by Press and release the UP arrow button to scrollpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering upward through the main menu and sub-wheel: menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up). • DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to 4 scroll downward through the main menu and sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up). EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons
  • 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• RIGHT Arrow Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to access/select the information screens or sub- menu screens of a main menu item. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two secondsto reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.• LEFT Arrow Button Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu from an info screen or sub-menu item.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the 8. Launch Control status when launch control mode iscluster and consists of the following sections: entered.1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and menu. The main display area also displays “pop up” white for on demand information. messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa- into several categories: 4 tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus is shown here. • Five Second Stored Messages3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five4. Telltales/Indicators seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of5. Selectable Information (Vehicle Info, SRT, Fuel the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the Economy, Stored Messages, Audio, Trip A, Trip B, condition that activated it remains active) and can be Average MPG) reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in6. Suspension Status7. ESC Status
  • 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELthe EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” Messagesand “Low Tire Pressure”. • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled• Unstored Messages • Driver Seatbelt UnbuckledThis message type is displayed indefinitely or until the • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckledcondition that activated the message is cleared. Examplesof this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal • Key Fob Battery Lowis left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle). • Service Airbag System• Five Second Unstored Messages • ESC StatusWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofmessage takes control of the main display area for five • Oil Pressure Lowseconds and then returns to the previous screen. An • Fuel Lowexample of this message type is “Automatic High BeamsOn”. • Service Antilock Brake System • Service Electronic Throttle Control • Cruise Off
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169• Cruise Ready • Right Turn Signal Light Out• Cruise Set To XXX MPH • Left Turn Signal Light Out• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings • Turn Signal On• Service Tire Pressure System • Service Airbag System• Parking Brake Engaged • Service Airbag Warning Light• Brake Fluid Low • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled 4• Service Electronic Braking System • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled• Engine Temperature Hot • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled• Battery Voltage Low • Door Open• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Doors Open• Lights On • Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
  • 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEVIC Amber Telltales EVIC Red TelltalesThis area will show amber caution telltales. These tell- This area will show red telltales. These telltales include:tales include: • Door Ajar• Low Fuel Telltale This light will turn on to indicate that one or When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal more doors may be ajar. (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on untilfuel is added. • Trunk Ajar• Electronic Speed Control Ready This telltale is on when the trunk is not closed. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” • Oil Pressure Warning Light This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light does not show how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with theThe engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The• Charging System Light light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb This light shows the status of the electrical charg- check. If the light does not come on during starting, have ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while the system checked by an authorized dealer.driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential 4electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If If a problem is detected, the light will come on while thethe charging system light remains on, it means that the engine is running. Cycle the ignition when the vehiclevehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging has completely stopped and the shift lever is in Neutral,system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- with the Parking Brake applied. The light should turn off.rized dealer. If the light remains lit with the engine running, yourIf jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
  • 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Temperature Warning Light EVIC Green Telltales This light warns of an overheated engine condi- • Electronic Speed Control SET tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- This telltale will illuminate green when theproaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single electronic speed control is SET. For furtherchime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con-overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Yourthe indicator will continuously flash and a continuous Vehicle.”chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool. EVIC Selectable Menu ItemsIf the light turns on while driving, safely pull over andstop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons untilshift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in thehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to EVIC.normal, turn the engine off immediately and call forservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173Tachometer arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll through the following information sub-menus: Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted Tire Pressure in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until arrow button to change the display between “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press andfull tachometer or with digital speedometer. release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following 4MPH — km/h will be displayed:Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON isthe MPH-km/h icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press displayed with tire pressure values in each corner ofand release the RIGHT arrow button to change the the ICON.display between MPH or km/h • If one or more tires have low pressure, The tireVehicle Info (Customer Information Features) pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow color than the other tire pressure value. button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
  • 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTire PSI is an information only function and cannot be Battery Voltagereset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button untilto the main menu. “Battery Voltage” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press andRefer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” release the RIGHT arrow button and the battery voltageunder “Starting and Operating” for further information. will be displayed.Coolant Temperature Intake Air Temp.Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press “Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press andand release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant release the RIGHT arrow button and the intake airtemperature will be displayed. temperature will be displayed.Oil Temperature Current TorquePress and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and “Current Torque” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press andrelease the RIGHT arrow button and the oil temperature release the RIGHT arrow button and the current torquewill be displayed. will be displayed.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175Current Power 1/8 Mile Top Speed & DurationPress and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until“Current Power” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information isrelease the RIGHT arrow button and the current power displayed.will be displayed. Current G-ForcesSRT Performance Info Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Current G-Forces are displayed. 4 Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the SRT icon is highlighted in the Peak G-Forces EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until button and 0–60 MPH Duration will be dis- the Peak G-Forces are displayed.played. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scrollthrough the following information sub-menus: 0–60 MPHBraking Distance Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the last 0–06 MPH information is displayed.Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button untilthe last Braking Distance information is displayed.
  • 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELFuel Economy Trip B Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is high- button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the lighted. Press the RIGHT arrow button and the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow next screen will display the following: button to display the Trip B information.Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar- Audiograph)Range To Empty (RTE) Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is high-Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG) lighted in the EVIC. Press and release theTrip A RIGHT arrow button to display the active source and the audio information. Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Trip A information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177Stored Messages Vehicle Hibernation Press and release the UP arrow button until the Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Messages display icon is highlighted in the button until the Hibernation icon is highlighted EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow arrow button to activate the Vehicle Hiberna-button will allow you to see what the stored messages tion Mode, which minimizes vehicle battery drain whileare. the vehicle is being stored. 4Diagnostic Codes Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Upper Left Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow • None button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high- lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the • Compass RIGHT arrow button to display any present • Outside Temp (default setting)diagnostic trouble codes along with a brief definition. • Time • Range To Empty (RTE)
  • 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Average MPG • Average MPG• Current MPG • Current MPG• Trip A • Trip A• Trip B • Trip B• Coolant Temp. • Coolant Temp.• Oil Temp. • Oil Temp.• Battery Voltage • Battery VoltageUpper Right Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)• None • Cancel• Compass (default setting) • Okay• Outside Temp• Time• Range To Empty (RTE)
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179Uconnect™ ACCESS SETTINGS Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect™The Uconnect™ Access system uses a combination of soft Access System Settingsand hard keys located on the center of the instrument Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-keypanel that allows you to access and change the customer to display the menu setting screen. In this mode theprogrammable features. Uconnect™ Access system allows you to access program- mable features that may be equipped such as Display,Hard-Keys Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect™ Access Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Operation, Compass Set- 4system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, tings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SiriusXM™ Setup.there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the rightside of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru- NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at ament panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through time.menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter thecenter of the control knob one or more times to select or desired mode. Once in the desired mode press andchange a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-Soft-Keys lected.Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect™ Access dis- Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrowplay. soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
  • 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsoft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scaleUp or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backscreen will allow you to toggle up or down through the soft-key.available settings. • Display Brightness With Headlights OFFDisplay When in this display, you may select the brightness withAfter pressing the Display soft-key the following settings the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –will be available. setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale• Display Mode between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.When in this display you may select one of the autodisplay settings. To change Mode status, touch and • Set Languagerelease the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the When in this display, you may select one of threearrow back soft-key. languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip• Display Brightness With Headlights ON functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desiredWhen in this display, you may select the brightness with language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to thethe headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181• Units pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatWhen in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyodometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed to return to the previous menu.between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US orMetric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equippedshowing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directionsarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a 4• Voice Response Length designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn InWhen in this display, you may change the Voice Re- Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to thesponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch theLength, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Clockto return to the previous menu. After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings• Touchscreen Beep will be available.When in this display, you may turn on or shut off thesound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
  • 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Sync Time With GPS make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-keyWhen in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key toradio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Formatselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time formatprevious menu. display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a• Set Time Hours check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backWhen in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To makeyour selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the • Show Time In Status Barhours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to When in this display, you may turn on or shut off thereturn to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key todigital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Timeclose out of the settings screen. Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key• Set Time Minutes until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyWhen in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The to return to the previous menu.Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183Safety / Assistance LightsAfter pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol- After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settingslowing settings will be available. will be available.• ParkView௡ Backup Camera • Headlight Illumination On ApproachYour vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear When this feature is selected, the headlights will activateBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorsimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 4the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired timecaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to thetop of the screen. After five seconds, this note will previous menu.disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear • Headlights With Wipers — If Equippedof the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make yourselection, touch the ParkView௡ Backup Camera soft-key, When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch isuntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.to return to the previous menu. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
  • 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELyour selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previoussetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key menu.to return to the previous menu. Doors & Locks• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the followingWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on settings will be available.whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, • Auto Unlock On Exittouch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock whenhas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in thereturn to the previous menu. PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock• Flash Headlights With Lock On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next toWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will flash setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch thewhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be • Flash Headlight With Lockselected with or without the sound horn on lock featureselected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- When this feature is selected, the front and headlightslights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Pressselection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first pressa check-mark appears next to setting, showing that of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Keyto return to the previous menu. Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which• Sound Horn With Lock Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only theWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when 4 driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door isthe Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fobselection, touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more thana check-mark appears next to setting, showing that once will only result in the driver’s door opening. Ifsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key driver door first is selected, once the driver door isto return to the previous menu. opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only thedriver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Engine Off OptionsKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press lowing settings will be available.the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
  • 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Off Power Delay Compass SettingsWhen this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped), ing settings will be available.DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if • Varianceequipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening Compass Variance is the difference between Magneticeither front door will cancel this feature. To change the North and Geographic North. To compensate for theEngine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 differences the variance should be set for the zone whereseconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyarrow back soft-key. set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass• Headlight Off Delay heading.When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofhave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compassDelay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your module is located, and it can cause interference with thedesired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to compass sensor, and it may give false readings.return to the previous menu.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. Audio After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings 4 will be available. • Balance/Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Compass Variance Map Fade settings.• Perform Compass Calibration • EqualizerTouch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid andcompass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalecompass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backCAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
  • 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Paired Devicesfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touch This feature shows which phones are paired to thedirectly on the desired setting. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer• Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect™ Access User’s Manual.This feature increases or decreases volume relative to SiriusXM™ Setupvehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the followingtouch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow settings will be available.back soft-key. • Channel Skip• Surround Sound SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group ofThis feature provides simulated surround sound mode. channels that are the most desirable to listen to or toTo make your selection, touch the Surround Sound exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To makesoft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select theback soft-key. channels you would like to skip followed by pressing thePhone/Bluetooth arrow back soft-key.After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow-ing settings will be available.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189• Subscription Information Uconnect™ ACCESS RADIOS – IF EQUIPPEDNew vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free For detailed information on the Uconnect™ 3.0,limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio Uconnect™ 5.0, Uconnect™ 8.4A or the Uconnect™with your radio. Following the expiration of the free 8.4AN refer to your Uconnect™ Access User’s Manual.services, it will be necessary to access the information onthe Subscription Information screen in order to re- iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDsubscribe. 4Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-scription Information screen.Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. Toreactivate your service, either call the number listed onthe screen or visit the provider online.NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscrip-tion.
  • 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThis feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to be The button located in the center of the right hand controlplugged into the USB port. will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡ The left hand control is a rocker type switch with aand iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions may pushbutton in the center. The function of the left handnot fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visit control is different depending on which mode you are in.Apple’s website for software updates. The following describes the left hand control operation inFor further information, refer to the Uconnect™ Access each mode.User’s Manual. Radio OperationSTEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the nextThe remote sound system controls are located on the rear listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switchsurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to will SEEK down for the next listenable station.access the switches. The button located in the center of the left hand controlThe right hand control is a rocker type switch with a will tune to the next pre-set station that you havepushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the RADIO ANTENNAswitch will decrease the volume. The radio antenna is located in the windshield.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in Hard-Keysyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from The hard-keys located below the Uconnect™ Accessyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated screen.by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition isnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance doesnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 4turned down or off during mobile phone operation whennot using Uconnect™ (if equipped).CLIMATE CONTROLSThe Climate Control System allows you to regulate thetemperature, amount, and direction of air circulatingthroughout the vehicle. The controls are located on theinstrument panel below the radio. Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
  • 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSoft-Keys Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect™ Access systemscreen. 1. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. 2. Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON. 3. AUTO Temperature Control Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and Uconnect™ Access Temperature Controls — Soft-keys release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1934. Front Defrost Button CAUTION!Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage toDefrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea- the heating elements:ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATCto switch into manual mode. The blower speed may • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onincrease when Defrost mode is selected. If the front the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothdefrost mode is turned off the climate system will returnthe previous setting. and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the 4 heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after5. Rear Defrost Button soaking with warm water.Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasivedefroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window cleaners on the interior surface of theAn indicator will illuminate when the rear window window.defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.turns off after 10 minutes.
  • 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL6. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets andThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air warmer air from the floor outlets.comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Modeas follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side• Panel Mode window demister outlets. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Mix Mode adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of Air comes from the floor, defrost and side windowthe center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up demist outlets. This mode works best in cold orand down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. snowy conditions.There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes toshut off or adjust the amount of airflow from theseoutlets.• Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1957. Blower Control 8. Climate Control OFF ButtonBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controlforced through the climate system. There are seven ON/OFF.blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause 9. Temperature Control Down Buttonautomatic mode to switch to manual operation. Thespeeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keys Push the button for cooler temperature settings.as follows: 10. Temperature Control Up Button 4Hard-key Push the button for warmer temperature settings.The blower speed increases as you turn the control Automatic Operationclockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blowerspeed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise. 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on theSoft-key Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like theand the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Oncearea between the icons. the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
  • 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Recirculation Control not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid- ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to system to function automatically. recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATIONNOTE: control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for blower control knob when this button is selected. Push cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. comfort as quickly as possible. NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window feature. Refer to the “Uconnect™ Access System Set- clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto- tings” in this section of the manual. matically if these modes are selected.To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Summer Operationmode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remainon low until the engine warms up. The blower will The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehiclesincrease in speed and transition into Auto mode. must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibilityglycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. of compressor damage when the system is started again.Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Window Fogging and FrostingVehicle” for proper coolant selection. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass inWinter Operation mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frostTo ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clearmance, make sure the engine cooling system is function- the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase 4ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen- the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculationtration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging mayProcedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper occur.coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode Outside Air Intakeduring Winter months is not recommended because itmay cause window fogging. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. LeavesVacation/Storage collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can causeAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intakeconditioning system at idle for about five minutes in is clear of ice, slush and snow.fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
  • 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELControl Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
  • STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSⅥ STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Ⅵ DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Ⅵ DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 5Ⅵ MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 ▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Ⅵ POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Ⅵ STREET/RACE MODE – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .209 Ⅵ PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Ⅵ LAUNCH MODE – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .210
  • 200 STARTING AND OPERATINGⅥ BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Ⅵ TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Brake Pad Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Ⅵ ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .222 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .240 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Ⅵ TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Tire Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .231 Ⅵ SNOW TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .232 Ⅵ TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .244
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 201Ⅵ TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .245 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Ⅵ ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .254Ⅵ FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Ⅵ TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ 8.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Ⅵ RECREATIONAL TOWING ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat towing with all four 5 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .249 wheels on the ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Ⅵ GROUND CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
  • 202 STARTING AND OPERATINGSTARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION!Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust theinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if Long periods of engine idling, especially at highpresent, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust tempera-belt. tures, which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running. WARNING! Normal Starting Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a CAUTION! number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- Long periods of engine idling, especially at high ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust tempera- or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to tures, which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave children), and do not leave a vehicle equipped with your vehicle unattended with the engine running. Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 203NOTE: 3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.• You must disarm the security system in order to start 4. Press the red ENGINE START/STOP button located the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in on the instrument panel. Release the button when the “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for engine starts. further information.• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. However, if the engine has not started within three seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while 5 continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.To Start The Engine:1. Fully apply the parking brake.2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. Engine START/STOP ButtonNOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedalis pressed to the floor.
  • 204 STARTING AND OPERATINGIf Engine Fails To Start WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the converter and once the engine has started, ignite engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle 15 seconds before trying again. has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the WARNING! battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this proce- • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into dure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to To Do In Emergencies” for further information. start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the ENGINE (Continued) START button is released. If this occurs, continue crank- ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ENGINE START button once the engine is running smoothly.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 205If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 CAUTION!second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedalheld to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should • Never drive with your foot resting on the clutchbe repeated. pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with theAfter Starting clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will • Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floordecrease as the engine warms up. may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission.MANUAL TRANSMISSION • Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while 5NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the driving, as this may result in transmission damage.shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the • Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rearvehicle, especially when parked on an incline. wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam- age to the transmission may occur.Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dualdisc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the Be sure the transmission is in first gear when movingfloor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal, forward from a standing position.lightly press the accelerator pedal.
  • 206 STARTING AND OPERATING The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and CAUTION! fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the from a starting position may result in damage to the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first clutch. to fourth or from sixth to third gear. You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for mostShifting city driving. For steady highway driving with lightFully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, orclutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedalto the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on thefully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator clutch.pedal when shifting. Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to aThe six-speed manual transmission has a spring that complete stop.centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. Thisspring helps you know which gear you are in when youare shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to secondor downshifting from sixth to fifth.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 207NOTE: (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than not an indication of a problem with your clutch or 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help transmission. prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with • You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift starting from a standing position. efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF position. This is normal operation of the transmission CAUTION! reverse inhibitor system. 5 Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so increased effort until the transmission lubricant is may result in transmission damage. warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission. Recommended Shift Speeds• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it a certain amount of noise from the transmission is should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
  • 208 STARTING AND OPERATINGcruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed isincreased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated. greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph (29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,650 RPM, and MANUAL TRANSMISSION the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS 20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light” 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5-6 located in the tachometer will illuminate during these times. mph 15 25 40 45 50 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72) (80) When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear toHigher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourthacceleration rate. gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to anotherSkip Shift Indicator Light forward gear. Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel There are times when you must shift the trans- economy and prolong engine life. mission directly from first gear into fourth gear To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down- instead of from first gear into second gear. This shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep is to help you get the best possible fuel grade.economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 209 braking situations. The system also reduces body roll and CAUTION! pitch in many driving situations including acceleration If you skip more than one gear while downshifting and braking. There are two modes of operation: or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could NOTE: With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the damage the engine, transmission, or clutch. suspension damping system will be in the last mode the system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The WARNING! driver can select either Street or Race damping mode at any time. Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You • Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but 5 could have a collision. comfortable ride. Within this mode, the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs, including vehicleSTREET/RACE MODE – IF EQUIPPED speed, braking and acceleration. This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in STREET modeThis vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled (press the “STREET” button on the Instrument Panel).damping system. This system allows for a street suspen- This mode will set suspension for maximum perfor-sion damping setting or a firmer race suspension damp- mance handling and is intended for a smoother ride oning setting. When in street mode the system automati- the various types of pavement and road conditionscally shifts the suspension dampers to the firmer Race while still providing damping levels appropriate ex-damping setting during some hard acceleration and treme capabilities.
  • 210 STARTING AND OPERATING• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the 4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button (Located on vehicle is placed in RACE mode (press the “RACE” the steering wheel controls). button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.NOTE: The RACE setting will provide a firmer ride.• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with “RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument cluster.LAUNCH MODE – IF EQUIPPEDThis system maximizes acceleration traction for straightline racing.1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface LAUNCH Button with the engine running. 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear position.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 211NOTE: If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACESconditions are correct for launch and the throttle is Accelerationpressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset WARNING!speed (below the engine rev limiter speed). Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.6. Release the clutch. You could lose control of the vehicle and possiblyPressing the launch control button when launch control is have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefullyactive will deactivate launch control also shifting the whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).vehicle into second gear will disable the system.. 5NOTE: Traction• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch. wedge of water to build up between the tire and road Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To through first gear. reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Modes. 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.
  • 212 STARTING AND OPERATING2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ CAUTION! centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested Flowing/Rising Water into the engine. This can cause severe engine dam- age. WARNING!3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become Do not drive on or across a road or path where water visible. is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-4. Keep tires properly inflated. ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this stop. warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 213Shallow Standing Water CAUTION! (Continued)Although your vehicle is capable of driving through • Driving through standing water may cause damageshallow standing water, consider the following Caution to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Alwaysand Warning before doing so. inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., CAUTION! fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after • Always check the depth of the standing water driving through standing water. Do not continue to before driving through it. Never drive through operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- standing water that is deeper than the bottom of nated, as this may result in further damage. Such 5 the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited • Determine the condition of the road or the path Warranty. that is under water and if there are any obstacles in • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can the way before driving through the standing water. cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not through standing water. This will minimize wave covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. effects. (Continued)
  • 214 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING WARNING! The standard power steering system will give you good• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. steering capability if power assist is lost.• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will distances. Therefore, after driving through stand- still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi- ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can parking maneuvers. cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you NOTE: stranded.• Failure to follow these warnings may result in • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas- travel are considered normal and do not indicate that sengers, and others around you. there is a problem with the power steering system. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 215 system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system. apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- WARNING! rized dealer. Continued operation with reduced power steering CAUTION! assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by CAUTION! the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering WARNING! fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and occur. with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. DoPower Steering Fluid Check not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommendedChecking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid.service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
  • 216 STARTING AND OPERATINGIf necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated The parking brake should always be applied when thelevel. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all driver is not in the vehicle.surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- WARNING!tion. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully applyPARKING BRAKE the parking brake and shift the transmission into REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing the button on the end of the handle. When the button
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 217drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the WARNING!handle downward to its stop and then release the buttonand the handle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. LeavingThe “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for acluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN number of reasons. A child or others could beposition and the parking brake is applied. injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessibleNOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is to children), and do not leave a vehicle equippedapplied or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUNthe degree of brake application. If the “Brake System mode. A child could operate power windows, other 5Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake is controls, or move the vehicle.not applied please see your authorized dealer. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake failure, and an accident.
  • 218 STARTING AND OPERATINGBRAKE SYSTEM Brake Pad Break-In NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi- brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance systems loses normal capability, the remaining for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type system will still function. However, there will of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly underbe some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., duringnotice increased pedal travel during application, greater light brake applications).pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a longactivation of the “Brake System Warning Light.” break-in period. However, you should avoid repeatedIn the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., hard brake applications from high speeds during initialrepeated brake applications with the engine off) the break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brakebrakes will still function. However, the effort required to loading, such as may be encountered when descendingbrake the vehicle will be much greater than that required long mountain grades.with the power system operating.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 219Safe Operating Tips WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can To use your brakes and accelerator more safely, build up between the tire tread and the road. This follow these tips: hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, • Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the braking ability, and control. pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in • After going through deep water or a car wash, unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis- brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased tances, or brake damage. performance and unpredictable braking action. • When descending mountains or hills, repeated 5 Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking while driving at very slow speeds. control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down- shifting the transmission whenever possible. Anti-Lock Brake System The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the (Continued) driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse brak- ing conditions. The system operates with a separate com- puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
  • 220 STARTING AND OPERATINGNOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen- WARNING!sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. Thisis normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal stalled or high output radio transmittingmovement. The movement can be more apparent on ice equipment. This interference can cause possibleand snow. This is normal. loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualifiedThe ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph professionals.(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminishmakes a low humming noise during operation, which is their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.normal. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just CAUTION! press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused (Continued) by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele- phones.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 221 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing the natural laws of physics from acting on the sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering of braking effectiveness. efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn speed in turns, following another vehicle too 5 on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the closely, or hydroplaning. ignition is first turned on. If the light does not • The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System turn on during starting, have it repaired (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in promptly. a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar- dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remainsAll vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at roadtype as the original equipment and the tires must be speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that theproperly inflated to produce accurate signals for the system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts tocomputer. standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
  • 222 STARTING AND OPERATINGthe vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle controlremains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to under adverse braking conditions. The system controlshave the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up andLight” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.parking brake is fully released, see your authorized Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting anddealer immediately. Operating” for further information.ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING!Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsbrake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase theSystem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. TheAssist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Control ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those result-(ESC). All of these systems work together to enhance ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on veryvehicle stability and control in various driving condi- slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilitiestions. of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeop- ardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 223Traction Control System (TCS) In full on mode ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer theThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is When the actual path does not match the intended path,applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel toreduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer orElectronic Stability Control understeer.In full on mode this system enhances directional control • Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more thanand stability of the vehicle under various driving condi- appropriate for the steering wheel position.tions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeer- 5ing the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate • Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less thanwheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in appropriate for the steering wheel position.counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeerand help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
  • 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ESC Operating Modes WARNING!The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded byprevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent allaccidents, including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidentsresulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannerwhich could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ESC Buttonof others.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 225The ESC system has four available operating modes: message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-ESC On tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentThis is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again,ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.mode. This mode should be used for most drivingsituations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for WARNING!specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicleFull Off stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer- 5This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will notonly and should not be used on any public roadways. In engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Fullthis mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the road only.“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle isstopped with the engine running. After five seconds, achime will sound, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-dicator Light” will illuminate, and the ЉESC OFFЉ mes-sage will display in the vehicle odometer. The “ESC OFF”
  • 226 STARTING AND OPERATINGSport Mode the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC Track Light” will illuminate, and the ЉESC TRACKЉ message will display inSport mode has reduced traction control and reduced the vehicle odometer. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, press mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel). ment Panel” for further information.The “ESC Sport Light” will illuminate, and the ЉESCSPORTЉ message will display in the vehicle odometer.Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” WARNING!in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torqueinformation. reduction and stability features are cancelled. There-Track Mode fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.Track Mode has no traction control and has reducedstability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, press
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 227TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:Tire Markings • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire 5 size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo- Temperature Grades rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
  • 228 STARTING AND OPERATING compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample: T145/80D18 103M. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE:Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — ЉRЉ means radial construction — ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 229 EXAMPLE:Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 5Load Identification: ؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressureMaximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire
  • 230 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewallThe TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found onhowever, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including thedate code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway useMA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 231Tire Terminology And Definitions Term DefinitionB-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). 5Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres- Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressuresure as shown on the tire placard.Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
  • 232 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Loading And Tire PressureTire And Loading Information Placard LocationNOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed onthe driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’sside door. Tire Placard Location
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 233Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading 5 The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire Tire and Loading Information Placard inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
  • 234 STARTING AND OPERATINGNOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limitgross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-axles must not be exceeded. For further information on pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs orGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.“Vehicle Loading” in this section. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andTo determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount oftrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe weight referenced here. “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 2355. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE: being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • The following table shows examples on how to calcu- safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities capacity calculated in Step 4. of your vehicle with varying seating configurations6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your and number and size of occupants. This table is for trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for manual to determine how this reduces the available the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 5 (392 kg).
  • 236 STARTING AND OPERATING
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Safety WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING! can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the cause collisions. recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re- overload them. sult in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionTIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes canTire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure. 5Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting inareas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob- lems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued)
  • 238 STARTING AND OPERATING stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of WARNING! (Continued) sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict- right or left. able steering response. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the mended cold tire inflation pressure. vehicle to drift left or right.Economy Tire Inflation PressuresImproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on thepatterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s sidewear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for door.earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as welltire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage attion. least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gaugeRide Comfort And Vehicle Stability to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may lookProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortableride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per CAUTION! 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent the winter. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tireInflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for thisis defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition. 5been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressureinflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide rangeof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary withtemperature changes.
  • 240 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply TiresThe manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedswithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tiresspeeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handleimportant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Nevertion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loadingand cold tire inflation pressures. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your WARNING! authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- Tire Spinning mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not tires could cause them to fail. You could have a spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above ping when you are stuck. 75 mph (120 km/h).
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 241Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do InEmergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam- age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some- one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu- ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near 5 a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.Tread Wear Indicators 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New TireTread wear indicators are in the original equipment tiresto help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadreplaced. grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
  • 242 STARTING AND OPERATINGLife Of Tire WARNING!The service life of a tire is dependent upon varyingfactors including, but not limited to: Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to• Driving style follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.• Tire pressure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.• Distance driven Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced with oil, grease, and gasoline. tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- tenance schedule is highly recommended. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 243Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. WARNING!The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will befound on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanTire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety that specified for your vehicle. Some combinationsInformation section of this manual for more information of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. pension dimensions and performance characteris-It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, andrear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a able handling and stress to steering and suspen-wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match sion components. You could lose control and have 5those of the original wheels. a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratingsIt is recommended you contact your original equipment approved for your vehicle.or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may • Never use a tire with a smaller load index orhave on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use capacity, other than what was originally equippedequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller loadsafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. (Continued)
  • 244 STARTING AND OPERATING SNOW TIRES WARNING! (Continued) • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having There are no snow tires that are compatible with the adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire wheels on this vehicle. failure and loss of vehicle control. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at CAUTION! different loads and perform different steering, driving, Replacing original tires with tires of a different size and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at may result in false speedometer and odometer read- unequal rates. ings. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.Tire Storage The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season typeTire storage is addressed in the Pirelli Limited Tire tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintainWarranty Booklet. mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to aSpecific recommendations on guidelines for long term smooth, quiet ride.tire storage for this vehicle should be requested of thePirelli Tire Corporation 1-800-747-3554.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 245Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotationis permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything caus-ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tirerotation.NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres-sure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)learns the location of each sensor though system pro-gramming. Although not required, the manufacturerrecommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the 5tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location.See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming. Tire RotationThe front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side” The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelessas shown in the diagram. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
  • 246 STARTING AND OPERATINGreadings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possibletant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (thoseyour vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres- flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to thesure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflationReceiver module, • Four TPM sensors, • Various TPMS value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Infor- sures, the system will automatically update, the graphicmation Center (EVIC), and • TPM Telltale Light The display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change colormatching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light willequipped) has a TPM sensor. turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMSTire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings to receive this information. The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound whentire pressure is low in one or more of the four active roadtires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ЉLOW TIREЉmessage and a graphic showing the pressure values ofeach tire with the low tire pressure values flashing orchanging color.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 247Service TPMS Warning 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels orThe system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the wheel housings.EVIC will display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.sensor is not being received. The EVIC will also display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉIf the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system 5providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault isno longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer detected. In this case, the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉflash, and the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message will no message is then followed with a graphic display withlonger display, and a pressure value will display in place pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensorsfollowing: but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message is displayed. next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
  • 248 STARTING AND OPERATINGFUEL REQUIREMENTS Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-8.4L Engine tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all emissions, engine performance, and durability for your emissions regulations and provide excellent vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso- fuel economy and performance when using lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are high-quality premium unleaded gasoline available. with an octane rating of 91 or higher. Reformulated GasolineLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful toyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”high speeds can cause damage and immediate service isrequired. Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe- cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard prove air quality.starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasolinebefore considering service for the vehicle. lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 249Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesSome fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanolmay be used in your vehicle. content may void the vehicle’s warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 CAUTION! fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- • operate in a lean mode line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob- • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on 5 lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause • poor engine performance emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi- • poor cold start and cold drivability nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once withProblems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and maynot be covered under warranty. • change the engine oil and oil filter
  • 250 STARTING AND OPERATING• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether engine controller memory the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMTMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged can be used at levels higher than those allowed in theexposure to E-85 fuel. United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-MMT In Gasoline nia reformulated gasoline.MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Materials Added To Fuelblended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline All gasoline sold in the United States is required toblended with MMT provides no performance advantage contain effective detergent additives. Use of additionalbeyond gasoline of the same octane number without detergents or other additives is not needed under normalMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug conditions and they would result in additional cost.life and reduces emissions system performance in some Therefore, you should not have to add anything to thevehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline fuel.without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 251Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s Most of these products contain high concentrationsperformance: of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. mance problems resulting from the use of such Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the mance and damage the emissions control system. manufacturer.• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control 5 overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or system can result in civil penalties being assessed against some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune you. or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser- vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued)
  • 252 STARTING AND OPERATINGCarbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main- tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected everyCarbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormalFollow the precautions below to prevent carbon conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drivemonoxide poisoning: with all side windows fully open.• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex- kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as haust gases from entering the vehicle. a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the ADDING FUEL vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine 1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the running for more than a short period, adjust the driver’s door map pocket). ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. 2. Open the fuel filler door. (Continued) 3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 2534. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the WARNING! nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel- ing. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near theNOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank isallowing the flapper door to open. being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle in violation of most state and federal fire regula- “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a 5NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the portable container that is inside of a vehicle. Youspare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for could be burned. Always place gas containers onemergency refueling with a gas can. the ground while filling. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
  • 254 STARTING AND OPERATINGEmergency Fuel Filler Door Release 3. Pull the release cable.If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel TRAILER TOWINGfiller door emergency release. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.1. Open the trunk.2. Remove the access cover (located on the right side inner trim panel).RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground) Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual TransmissionFlat Tow None • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 65 mph (105 km/h) maximum speedDolly Tow Front Not Recommended Rear Not RecommendedOn Trailer All OK
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 255NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four CAUTION!wheels are off the ground. Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills canGROUND CLEARANCE occur if you disregard the low ground clearance inThe front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention whenground clearance is limited. parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exer- cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive- ways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul- ders. 5
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESCONTENTSⅥ HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . .258 ▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264Ⅵ IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Ⅵ JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .269Ⅵ TIREFIT KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Ⅵ FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Ⅵ TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .260 6 ▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
  • 258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESHAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce thecenter of the instrument panel above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac- tion. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — Slow down and use the highesttional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming gear possible.traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmissionturn off the Hazard Warning flasher. in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.This is an emergency warning system and it should not • In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highestbe used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your gear possible to reduce engine RPM.vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard forother motorists. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, theHazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/Cthough the ignition is placed in the OFF position. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashermay wear down your battery.
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum TIREFIT KIT heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be to high. This allows the heater core to act as a sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can from the engine cooling system. be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). WARNING! This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you You or others can be badly burned by hot engine to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr). you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time 6 to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
  • 260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESTIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And OperationThe TIREFIT kit is located in left side of the trunk. TIREFIT Components TIREFIT Location 1. Sealant Bottle 2. Deflation Button 3. Pressure Gauge
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2614. Power Button Selecting Sealant Mode5. Mode Select Knob Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant6. Sealant Hose (Clear) and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant7. Air Pump Hose (Black) Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.8. Power PlugUsing The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power ButtonYour TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbolsto indicate the air or sealant mode. Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release theSelecting Air Mode Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT 6 Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position kit. for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Using The Deflation Button Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
  • 262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESTIREFIT Usage Precautions • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant TIREFIT kit. Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys- • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose tire application use. After each use, always replace (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the these components immediately at an authorized Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting dealer. sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean tended to seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm) water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from diameter in the tread of your vehicle. the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses. sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the source. road to avoid the danger of being hit when using • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision the TIREFIT kit. or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place following circumstances: provided. Failure to follow these warnings can – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, 1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger. your passengers, and others around you. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to – If the tire has any damage from driving with come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE- 6 extremely low tire pressure. FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira- tire. tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of – If the wheel has any damage. water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any the wheel. contact with clothing. (Continued) (Continued)
  • 264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and WARNING! (Continued) running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of to place the valve stem in this position before proceed- an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician ing. immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty 3. Place the transmission in Gear and place the ignition of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce in the OFF position. vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. 4. Set the parking brake.Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT (B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT: 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode position.1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach deflated tire. the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2654. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire. valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 105. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.nails) from the tire. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode positionTire: and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- On the TIREFIT kit. 6 FIT kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 VoltNOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, ifparking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit.• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance.
  • 266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESNOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to driveIf the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the the vehicle further. Call for assistance.Sealant Hose (6): NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 mended inflation pressure before continuing. seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru- ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to ment panel. operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2673. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the (D) Drive Vehicle: valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not hicle”. exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). CAUTION! WARNING! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this 6 tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte- warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal to you, your passengers, and others around you. TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma- nent damage to the kit. (E) After Driving: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
  • 268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla- position. tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- mended inflation pressure before continuing.2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 123. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and Volt outlet. screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tireIf tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar), the tire is too service center.badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehiclefurther. Call for assistance. 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher: Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and inflate NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed information label on the driver-side door opening. using the TIREFIT service kit.
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the recessed area under the sealant bottle. vehicle.3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES of it accordingly. WARNING!4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- ing. • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the 6 ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan. that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the (Continued) housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
  • 270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access WARNING! (Continued) panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- compartment for jump-starting. axle cannot be started this way and may be dam- aged. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con- verter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Battery Location
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2711. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact.2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without allowing the vehicles touch one another.3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEU- TRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- cal loads. 65. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the Remote Jump Start Connections remote jump-start positive post (+) in the engine 1 — Positive Battery Post (+) compartment. Refer to the following illustration for 2 — Negative Battery Post (-) remote jump-starting connections.
  • 272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark or the discharged vehicle. could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery.8. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence:9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 11. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the the discharged battery. discharged battery. 12. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
  • WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 27313. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it14. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 2nd gear and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. UseIf frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle the least amount of pressure to maintain the rockingyou should have the battery and charging system in- motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing thespected at your authorized dealer. engine. CAUTION! CAUTION! Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle 6 • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, tween 2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s damage may result. battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. (Continued)
  • 274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued)• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed may lead to transmission or clutch overheating and equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the towing ordinances. wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- WARNING! ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- age from improper towing is not covered under theFast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- New Vehicle Limited Warranty.ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, oreven failure, of the axle and tires. A tire couldexplode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuously without stop-ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone neara spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284Ⅵ ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .278 ▫ Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Ⅵ EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288Ⅵ REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289Ⅵ DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289Ⅵ MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .281 7 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
  • 276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection ▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Ⅵ FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Ⅵ FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Ⅵ FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS ANDⅥ VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Ⅵ REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Ⅵ BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L 71 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir4 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Air Cleaner Filter5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
  • 278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) CAUTION!To meet new government regulations and promotecleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Prolonged driving with the light on could causeonboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system further damage to the emission control system. Itmonitors the performance of the emissions and engine could also affect fuel economy and driveability. Thecontrol systems. When these systems are operating prop- vehicle must be serviced before any state emissionserly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and tests can be performed.fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damagecurrent government regulations. and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service isIf any of these systems require service, the OBD II system required.will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will alsostore diagnostic codes and other information to assist EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEyour service technician in making repairs. Although your PROGRAMSvehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passyour authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ONthe engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as partready for testing. of a normal bulb check.Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willsystem may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen:serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFFready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that yourYour vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldwhich you can use prior to going to the test station. To not proceed to the I/M station.check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullydo the following: illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system 7 crank or start the engine. is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
  • 280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEyou may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICEvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-system to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all servicemay then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals areRegardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information forready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals beforevehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlyour vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civilrunning. penalties being assessed against you.REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!Use of genuine MOPAR௡ parts for normal/scheduled You can be badly injured working on or around amaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- motor vehicle. Only do service work for which yousure the designed performance. Damage or failures have the knowledge and the proper equipment. Ifcaused by the use of non-MOPAR௡ parts for maintenance you have any doubt about your ability to perform aand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-warranty. chanic.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION! (Continued)The pages that follow contain the required maintenance • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluidsservices determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of yourvehicle. vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-maintenance schedule, there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle CAUTION! Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- fluid for the flushing procedure. form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other Engine Oil 7 components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- Checking Oil Level mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must repair center. be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to (Continued)
  • 282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEcheck the oil level is approximately five minutes after a Engine Oil Selectionfully warmed engine is turned off or before starting the For best performance and maximum protection under allengine after it has sat overnight. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer onlyChecking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet thewill improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725.oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 0W-40 or equivalent engine oil. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or CAUTION! loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as theChange Engine Oil chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operatingvals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, temperatures.whichever occurs first.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended station or governmental agency for advice on how andengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded inengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- your area.ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Engine Oil Filtertion. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filterMaterials Added To Engine Oil at every engine oil change.The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- Engine Oil Filter Selectiondition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oilthe engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplemental addi- filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The qualitytives. of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficientDisposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. MOPAR௡ engine oil filters are a high quality oil 7Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filterindiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to theenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
  • 284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause provide a measure of protection in the case of engine mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air driveability problem or a limp home condition. cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is Maintenance-Free Battery near the engine compartment before starting the The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, must be replaced with a vented battery. hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. The battery is located underneath an access panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. AEngine Air Cleaner Filter Selection remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart- ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce-The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for furthervaries considerably. Only high quality filters should be information.used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR௡ engine aircleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom- To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion ofmended. the rear compartment carpet.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285 WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- diately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableBattery Location clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories 7 contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
  • 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE of storage time without losing radio and engine control- CAUTION! ler memory. Using this feature is an alternative to discon- • It is essential when replacing the cables on the necting the battery. battery that the positive cable is attached to the NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a positive post and the negative cable is attached to fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the doing one of the following: battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • Disconnect the battery. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the • Use the battery charger. vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be- • Put the vehicle into Battery Save mode (3-month fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not charge). use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. To Activate Hibernation ModeHibernation Mode 1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACCY).The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery powerwhen storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months 2. Select Hibernation mode within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2873. Press and hold the right arrow button on the steering CAUTION! wheel controls for 1 second. Vehicle will countdown from ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioningNOTE: You may press the right arrow button on the system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort tioning components. Such damage is not covered byHibernation Mode. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.To Deactivate Hibernation Mode WARNING!1. Press the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle. • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants2. Press the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants areAir Conditioner Maintenance flammable and can explode, injuring you. OtherFor best possible performance, your air conditioner unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the 7should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer toat the start of each warm season. This service should Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance for further warranty information.test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at thistime. (Continued)
  • 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Body Lubrication WARNING! (Continued) • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as should be done by an experienced technician. MOPAR௡ Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera- tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to theRefrigerant Recovery And Recycling application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricatingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- excess oil and grease should be removed. Particularcarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental attention should also be given to hood latching compo-Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- nents to ensure proper function. When performing otherever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanismservice be performed by authorized dealer or other and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice aNOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a smallsealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR௡oil, and refrigerants. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289Wiper Blades marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the sary.windshield and rear window periodically with a spongeor soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will Adding Washer Fluidremove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in thehelp reduce streaking and smearing. front of the engine compartment on the passenger side ofOperation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in themay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir withwasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (anti-from a dry windshield or rear window. freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flushAvoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from out the residual water.the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they arenot frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid WARNING! 7damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact Commercially available windshield washer solventswith petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. CareNOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- must be exercised when filling or working arounding on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor the washer solution.performance of blades may be present with chattering,
  • 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEExhaust System WARNING!The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containsystem. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconsciousIf you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathingor if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Thingsor when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherhave an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- information.haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you parkaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams over materials that can burn. Such materials mightor loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep be grass or leaves coming into contact with yourinto the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. tact anything that can burn.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- CAUTION! verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-• The catalytic converter requires the use of un- portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control damage. device and may seriously reduce engine perfor- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control mance and cause serious damage to the engine. systems can result in civil penalties being assessed• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your against you. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- 7 resulting in possible damage to the converter and tions, should be obtained immediately. vehicle.
  • 292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLETo minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling Systemage:• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, WARNING! when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in • When working near the radiator cooling fan, motion. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera- vehicle. ture controlled and can start at any time the igni- tion switch is in the ON position.• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURErusty in appearance, the system should be drained, CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refillfreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser/radiator If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains afor any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean bygently spraying water from a garden hose vertically considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with adown the face of the condenser/radiator. reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. ProperlyCheck the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connectionat the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the properleaks. maintenance intervals.With the engine at normal operating temperature (but Selection Of Coolantnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap for Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in 7proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
  • 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator. ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an- coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling tifreeze) is not recommended. system in an emergency, it should be replaced with Adding Coolant the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance (Continued) intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace- ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295period, it is important that you use the same engine Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherePlease review these recommendations for using Organic the vehicle is operated.Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage.• We recommend using MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/Coolant Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency. Technology). Cooling System Pressure Cap• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant anticipated. (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. 7• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
  • 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- WARNING! mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the any ground spills immediately. cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes Coolant Level pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for pressure cap while the system is hot or under determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the pressure. engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- indicated on the bottle. gine damage may result. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking forDisposal Of Used Engine Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as thea regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolantwith your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and inmaintain the proper level, it should be added to the the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-coolant bottle. Do not overfill. freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected againstPoints To Remember freezing.NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions arekilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming required, the cooling system should be pressure testedfrom the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- for leaks.mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration atized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine 50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) andcoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow 7safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. hoses are not kinked or obstructed.• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
  • 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter WARNING! operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting performance, poor gas mileage, and increased or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally emissions. high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andBrake System possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.In order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be inspected periodically. Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level CheckRefer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte- Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediatelynance intervals. if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- ure. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- forming underhood services.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing WARNING!the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level upto the requirements described on the brake fluid reser- • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brakevoir. fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineOverfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furthercause leaking in the system. information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/orWith disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the impair its performance. The proper type of brakebrake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused fluid for your vehicle is also identified on theby a leak and a checkup may be needed. original factory installed hydraulic master cylinderUse only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. reservoir.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in (Continued)“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Useof a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling 7point or unidentified as to specification, may result insudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
  • 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake This could result in an accident. fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may Change Brake Fluid cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo- longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with This could result in a accident. water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also Schedule” for further information. See your authorized damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be dealer for service. taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. (Continued)
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301Manual Transmission CAUTION!Transmission Fluid Level Check Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-Check the fluid in the transmission when performing turer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriorationother underbody services. in transmission shift quality and/or damage to theCheck the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, andthe left side of the transmission. The fluid level should beGenuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” forapproximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fluid specifications.fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper Change Transmission Fluidlevel. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte- nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change theNOTE:DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can oc- fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.cur. 7 Hydraulic Clutch Master Cylinder – Clutch Fluid Level Check The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
  • 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEmanufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu- CAUTION!ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information. Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom-Rear Axle mended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer to “Fluids Lubes and Genuine Parts” in “ Maintain-Axle Lubricant Level Check ing Your Vehicle” for further information.Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil Change Axle Lubricantleakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). Thischeck should be made with the vehicle level and on the Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately ifaxle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer forfiller plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) service.below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosionthe manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Protection Of Body And Paint From CorrosionYour Vehicle” for further information. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR௡parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami- Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protectnants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi- • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingtions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.underbody protection.The following maintenance recommendations will enableyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion CAUTION!resistance built into your vehicle. • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materialsWashing such as steel wool or scouring powder that will• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- scratch metal and painted surfaces. hicle in the shade using MOPAR௡ Car Wash, or a mild • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and 7 clear water. decals.• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR௡ Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
  • 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEWheel And Wheel Trim Care Interior Care• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Use MOPAR௡ Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly carpeting. with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. Use MOPAR௡ Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR௡ Total Clean is specifically recommended for MOPAR௡ Wheel Cleaner. leather upholstery. CAUTION! Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions and MOPAR௡ Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro- soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please tective finish. Only MOPAR௡ Wheel Cleaner or do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- equivalent is recommended. gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 Glass Surfaces WARNING! All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. with MOPAR௡ Glass Cleaner, or any commercial Many are potentially flammable, and if used in household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rearLeather or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care and Cleaning quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. DoLeather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that maydamp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an scratch the elements.abrasive and damage the leather surface and should beremoved immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on thecan be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR௡ towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerTotal Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid directly on the mirror.soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use 7polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, orammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Applicationof a leather conditioner is not required to maintain theoriginal condition.
  • 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle aremolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Aero Group — If Equippedmust be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Please review all of the precautionary notes regarding the1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Aero Group option. used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive Front Splitter cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. The front splitter will not flex or compress against impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the2. Dry with a soft cloth. splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitterSeat Belt Maintenance should be replaced.Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution orlukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car towash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 CAUTION! Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can damage your splitter. Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a slight angle may improve your clearance. CAUTION! Front Splitter • Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage to your splitter.Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone • Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 3/8 7you allow to operate the vehicle. inch (10 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid damage to the carbon fiber panel
  • 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEFUSESPower Distribution CenterThe Power Distribution Center is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Thiscenter contains fuses and relays. Power Distribution Center
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309Cavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse3 — 40 Amp Green — Rad Fan4 — 40 Amp Green — Rad Fan Rly High5 — 40 Amp Green — ABS/ESP Pump Feed6 — 40 Amp Green — Starter7 — 40 Amp Green — CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)8 — 40 Amp Green — CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)9 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Int. Liggting, washer)10 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Power Lock)11 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper12 — 25 Amp Natu- — ABS/ESP Valve Feed 7 ral13 — — 20 Amp Yel- Horn low14 — — 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
  • 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse15 — — 10 Amp Red Diagnostic, Mirror, Fuel Door, Stop Switch16 — — 15 Amp KIN, RF Hub Blue17 — — 25 Amp cir- Power Seats cuit breaker18 — 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Mod19 — 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Mod20 — 30 Amp Pink — EBL21 — 20 Amp Blue — Wiper22 — — — B+ Jumper23 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper24 — — 25 Amp PCM- Powertrain Control Module Natural
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311Cavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse25 — — 25 Amp Fuel Pump Natural26 — — 20 Amp Yel- ASD #1 low27 — — 20 Amp Yel- ASD #2 low28 — — — Spare29 — 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower30 — 20 Amp Yel- — RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI low 731 — — — B+ Jumper32 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper33 — 20 Amp Yel- — Spare low34 — — — B+ Jumper
  • 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse35 — Jumper Black — Spare36 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run37 — — 15 Amp Cluster, Mirror, Camera Blue38 — — 20 Amp Yel- Active Damping Suspension low39 — — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module, In Car Temp40 — — 15 Amp Radio Blue41 G8VA — — Run/Start42 G8VA — — Fuel Door43AC (For- — — 10 Amp Red SCCMward Fuse)43BE (Rear- — — 10 Amp Red Coraxward Fuse)
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313Cavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse44BE (Rear- — — 10 Amp Red IBSward Fuse)45 — — 10 Amp Red PCM- Powertrain Control Module46 — — 10 Amp Red ESP Module47 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Module48 — — 10 Amp Red SCCM49 — — 25 Amp Amplifier Natural50 HC Micro — — Rad Fan51 HC Micro — — Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR 752 HC Micro — — Starter Relay53 HC Micro — — EBL Relay54 HC Relay — — Rad Fan Relay High55 HC Micro — — Wiper ON/OFF
  • 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECavity Relay Cartridge Mini-Fuse Description Fuse56 HC Micro — — Wiper LO/HI —57 G8VA — — Horn Relay58 G8VA — — A/C Clutch Relay59 HC Micro — — HVAC Blower60 HC Micro — — Fuel Pump61 G8VA — — Run Relay #162 G8VA — — Run Relay #263 HC Micro — — ASD #164 HC Micro — — ASD #265 G8VA — — Run Accy #1, Pop Up
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 VEHICLE STORAGE CAUTION! We recommend that you follow these guidelines for• When installing the power distribution center storing your vehicle for extended periods. cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may • Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation allow water to get into the power distribution inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more center and possibly result in an electrical system than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to failure. the fuel tank.• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use • Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The related acids in the crankcase. use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may • Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If at least -20°F (-29°C). a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. • Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum 7 pressure. • Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish. • Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location. • Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
  • 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake. Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires. battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/ Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” place them between the tires and concrete. This will for further information. prevent tire flat spotting.• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con- vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and trol system to lose memory of some “learned” functions. cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting. After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough until the control module “relearns” these functions. Us-• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera- ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine tures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry, controller from loosing its memory. well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger (1.5 Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge protec- CAUTION! tion to the battery. However, do not leave the trickle charger hooked up to the battery without being Use care when disconnecting the remote positive plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts. the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317• Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure 3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR that the voltage is above 12.40 Volts. The voltage will switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system drop more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery check, which follows: voltage drops below 12.40 Volts, follow the battery Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the recharge procedure in the Service Manual. alarm SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating properly. If not, there is a problem with aNOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging switch or the system. See your authorized dealer forduring shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow- service.ing: • Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci-1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are dental damage to the finish. completely closed.2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- ter is operating and that the battery is good. 7
  • 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEREPLACEMENT BULBS Exterior Bulbs Bulb NumberInterior Bulbs Low/High Beam LED (Serviced at Bulb Number Headlamp Authorized Dealer)Message Center 103 Front Park/Turn Signal LED (Serviced atIndicators Lamp Authorized Dealer)Cluster 103 Front Side Marker Lamp 2886XGauge Pack 103 Center High Mounted LED (Serviced atHeater Control 37 Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Authorized Dealer)Interior Lamp LED (Serviced at Tail/Stop/Turn Signal LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Lamp Authorized Dealer)Courtesy Foot Well 194 Rear Marker Lamp 194Lights Backup Lamp 3157Cargo Lamp (Coupe 168 License Lamp LED (Serviced atLiftgate) Authorized Dealer)
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319BULB REPLACEMENT 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace- ment bulb.Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer. and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp 5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp side to disengage the clip. For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.NOTE: Rear Turn Signal Lamp• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer. placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint. 72. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
  • 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEBackup Lamps 5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.1. Reach behind the rear bumper and press the release tabs on the backup lamp housing. 6. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the backup lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.2. Separate the backup lamp housing from the rear bumper fascia. 7. Reinstall the backup lamp housing into the rear bum- per fascia.3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector.4. Turn the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the backup lamp assembly.
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. MetricFuel (Approximate) 16 Gallons 60.6 LitersEngine Oil With Filter8.4 Liter Engine – We recommend you use SAE 0W-40, 11 Quarts 10.4 LitersAPI Certified.Transmission8.4 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ 3.4 Quarts 3.2 LitersAutomatic Transmission Fluid.Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic 1.5 Quarts 1.4 Liters Gear and Axle Lubricant. 7Cooling System *8.4 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/ 16 Quarts 15 LitersEngine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
  • 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEFLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTSEngineComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Engine Oil Filters.Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Spark Plugs, see your authorized dealer.Fuel Selection We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher
  • MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartTransmission We recommend you use MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic Transmission Fluid.Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Brake and Clutch Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR௡ Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR௡ or ATF+4௡ Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7
  • M A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I N T ECONTENTS N AⅥ MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 N C ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .327 E S C H E D U L E S 8
  • M 326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES At Each Stop For FuelNT The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after aE manual must be done at the times or mileages specified fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil levelN to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best while the vehicle is on level ground will improve theAN vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main- accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only whenC tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.E conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip • Check the windshield washer solvent and add ifS driving. Inspection and service should also be done required.C anytime a malfunction is suspected.HE NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- Once A MonthD tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear orUL whichever comes first. damage.ES • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals CAUTION!8 as required. Failure to perform the required maintenance items • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake may result in damage to the vehicle. master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and add as needed.
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 327 M A• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct • Inspect the suspension components. I operation. N • Lubricate door hinges and check springs. TAt Each Oil Change E • Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps. N• Change the engine oil filter. A • Check power steering fluid level. N• Inspect the exhaust system. C Required Maintenance Intervals ENOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the followingchange in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the pages for the required maintenance intervals. S Cexhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle. H E• Inspect the brake hoses. D U L E S 8
  • M 328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance ServiceNT Months Maintenance Service ScheduleE Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.C ❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km)E or 12 months. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.S ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts forCH damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.EDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 329 M A18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 18 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service I NMonths Maintenance Service Schedule TSchedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). A❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. N❏ Change the rear axle fluid. ❏ Inspect the exhaust system. C ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. E ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for S damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. C H E D U L E SOdometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 330 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30 36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance ServiceNT Months Maintenance Service ScheduleE Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Change the rear axle fluid.E ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts forS brakes. damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.CHEDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 331 M A42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 42 48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service I NMonths Maintenance Service Schedule TSchedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). A❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. N ❏ Inspect the exhaust system. C ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for E damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. S ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. C H E D U L E SOdometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance ServiceNT Months Maintenance Service ScheduleE Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).C ❏ Change the rear axle fluid. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.S ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts forCH damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.E ❏ Change the rear axle fluid.DULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 333 M A66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or 72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service I N66 Months Maintenance Ser- Schedule Tvice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). A❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. N ❏ Change the rear axle fluid. C ❏ Inspect the exhaust system. E ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid. S ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for C damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. H E D U L E SOdometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance ServiceNT 78 Months Maintenance Ser- ScheduleE vice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.C ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.E ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.SCHEDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 335 M A90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service I N90 Months Maintenance Ser- Schedule Tvice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). A❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. N❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. C ❏ Inspect the exhaust system. E❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary.* ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for S❏ Change the rear axle fluid. damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. C❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. H equipped with four-wheel disc E brakes. D U L E SOdometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance ServiceNT 102 Months Maintenance Ser- ScheduleE vice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.C ❏ Change the rear axle fluid.E ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid. ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts forS damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.CHEDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337 M A114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or I N114 Months Maintenance Ser- Tvice Schedule E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N filter. A❏ Rotate tires. N C E S C H E D U L E SOdometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 338 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service ScheduleN ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.T ❏ Rotate tires.EN ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (250 000 km) whichever comes first.C ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Inspect the exhaust system.S ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.C ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or endH play; replace if necessary.EDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 339 M A126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service I N126 Months Maintenance Ser- Schedule Tvice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). A❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. N❏ Change the rear axle fluid. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary. C ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for E damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. S C H E D U L E SOdometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 340 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or 144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance ServiceNT 138 Months Maintenance Ser- ScheduleE vice Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.A filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.C ❏ Inspect the exhaust system.E ❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.S ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid.CH ❏ Change the rear axle fluid.EDULES8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center
  • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 341 M A150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or I N150 Months Maintenance Ser- Tvice Schedule E❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N filter. A❏ Rotate tires. N❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. C E❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 150,000 miles (250 000 km) or 120 S months whichever comes first. C❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles H equipped with four-wheel disc E brakes. D U L E SOdometer Reading Date 8Repair Order # Dealer CodeSignature, Authorized Service Center
  • M 342 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESAI * This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturerN to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissionsT warranty.ENA WARNING!NC • You can be badly injured working on or around aE motor vehicle. Do only service work for which youS have the knowledge and the right equipment. IfC you have any doubt about your ability to perform aHE service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-D chanic.U • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-LE hicle could result in a component malfunction andS effect vehicle handling and performance. This8 could cause an accident.
  • IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCECONTENTSⅥ SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Ⅵ WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Ⅵ MOPAR௡ PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349Ⅵ IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Ⅵ REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .346 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .346 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 9 Ⅵ PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .350
  • 344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCEⅥ DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
  • IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With RequestsYOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have yourPrepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rentalthe right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, itwork to be performed may not be covered by the is advisable to make these arrangements when you callwarranty. Discuss additional charges with the service for an appointment.manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEcurrent problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitallyPrepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happyMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to anservice advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9 service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
  • 346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCEfacilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer namethe latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileageThis is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Centersolved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621 center. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 Frenchter should include the following information:• Owner’s name and address• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
  • IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347In Mexico contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offeredAv. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect withMexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service ContractOutside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpectedCustomer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle LimitedImpaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind onlyTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased amanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plancation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mailcenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If youhas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customermanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
  • 348 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer will not stand behind any service WARNING!contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. Itis not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certainmanufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsvice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer andand you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certaincontract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancerWe appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealerhas also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATIONtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on thethe ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Groupsincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.concerns.
  • IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 349MOPARா PARTS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorizedMOPAR௡ fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are dealer, and the manufacturer.available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safetyoperating at its best. Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety fromIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.cause a crash or cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In CanadaAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, youmanufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department imme-If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyinvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and 9 Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/
  • 350 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCEPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure ManualsTo order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manualstercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fixcepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems andfor an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-NOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic testsmanuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment.Service Manuals Owner’s ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with themation that students and professional technicians need indiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve- quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
  • IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 351Call toll free at: Treadwear• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. ForOr example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire gradedVisit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in drivingDEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.The following tire grading categories were established bythe National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Thespecific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturerin each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires onyour vehicle.All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety 9requirements in addition to these grades.
  • 352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCETraction Grades controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause theThe Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andand C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thewet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which allon specified government test surfaces of asphalt and passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motorconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-mance. sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on WARNING! straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not The temperature grade for this tire is established for include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. peak traction characteristics. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-Temperature Grades ing, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heatand its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
  • INDEX 10
  • 354 INDEXAbout Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .14Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .283 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .141Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
  • INDEX 355Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .19 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .321 Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Storing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Caps, FillerBelts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .158 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .59 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 10
  • 356 INDEXClean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302Cleaning Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .121Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .295 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Dipsticks Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Disposal Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
  • INDEX 357Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .278Driving Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .141 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .127 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .131 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Emergency, In Case of Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 10
  • 358 INDEXEnhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Fluid Level ChecksEthanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301Filters Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .322 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Flashers Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
  • INDEX 359 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Hazard . . . . . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 .Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow . . . . . . . . . . .Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 . . . . . . . . . . . . Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 HeadlightsGasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .119Gauges Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .119Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 HomeLink௡ (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . .133 10
  • 360 INDEXHood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
  • INDEX 361Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . .121Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .158Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .157Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .153High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Loading VehicleIlluminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .158 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 10
  • 362 INDEXLow Tire Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) . . . . . . . . . . .131Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .158 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
  • INDEX 363 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Phone, Cellular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .233Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 PowerOnboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .141Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 PretensionersPanic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .295Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 10
  • 364 INDEXRear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .190 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
  • INDEX 365Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 SteeringService Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .158 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .190Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .39Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 10
  • 366 INDEXTilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .232 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .245 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19
  • INDEX 367Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .19 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .17 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .14Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .153Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 10
  • 368 INDEXWater Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
  • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optional EQUIPMENTname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and of features and equipment that are no longer available or vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. UseDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that are equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toaccidents. not on this vehicle. The following must be observed during installation. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood The positive power connection should be made directly toalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking normal may require special precautions. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- The negative power connection should be made to bodydriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped. drinking. Never drink and then drive.VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optional EQUIPMENTname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and of features and equipment that are no longer available or vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. UseDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that are equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toaccidents. not on this vehicle. The following must be observed during installation. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood The positive power connection should be made directly toalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking normal may require special precautions. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- The negative power connection should be made to bodydriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped. drinking. Never drink and then drive.
  • COVER IN 2013 ViperChrysler Group LLC OWNER’S MANUAL 2013 Viper Chrysler Group LLC13ZD-126-AA 13ZD-126-AA FirstEdition 1st Edition Printed in U.S.A. U.S.A. Printed in 1135554cv1 13ZD-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/11/2012 15:40:46 2013 Viper OWNER’S MANUAL 2013 Viper Chrysler Group LLC 13ZD-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A. COVER IN